AMERICAN SYSTEM 



ENGLISH SYNTAX, 



DEVELOPING 



THE CONSTRUCTIVE PRINCIPLES 



THE ENGLISH PHRENOD, OR LANGUAGE, 



AND IMPRESSING THEM ON THE MEMORY BY TICTORIAL, AND SCENICAL 

DEMONSTRATION, THUS ENABLING THE ADULT AT HOME, AND THE 

CHILD AT SCHOOL, TO ACQUIRE, IN A FEW MONTHS, A BETTER 

KNOWLEDGE OF SYNTAX BY THE AMERICAN SYSTEM 

THAN THEY CAN EVER ACQUIRE BY THE 

BRITISH. 



BY JAMES BROWN. *i> 



PHILADELPHIA: 
T. K. &. P. G. COLLINS, PRINTERS. 



1S3S. 



1 






y 









Entered according to act of Congress, in the vcar 1838, by JAM ES 
BROWN, in the Clerk's Office of the District Court for lh< I 

District of Pennsylvania. 

Extract from the Copy Right Law. 
§ 7. And be it further enacted. That, if any person or persons, after 
the recording the title of any print, cut, or engraving, map, chart, or 
musical composition, according to the provisions of tin* act, shall, 
within the term or terms limited by t is act, engrave, etch, or work, 
sell, or cop\ r , or caused to be engraved, etched, worked, or sold, or 
copied, either on the whole, or by varying, adding to, or diminishing 
the main design, with intent to evade the law, or shall print or import 
for sale, or cause to be printed or imported for sale, any such map, 
chart, musical composition, print, cut. or engraving, or any parts 
thereof, without the consent of the proprietor or pro orietors of the 
copy-right thereof, first obtained in writing, signed in the pn 
two credible witnesses; or, knowing the same to he so printed or im- 
ported without such consent, shall publish, sell or expose to sale, or in 
any manner dispose of, any such map, chart, musical composition, en- 
graving, cut, or print, without such consent, as aforesaid, then such 
offender or offenders shall forfeit the plate or plates on which such 
map, chart, musical composition, engraving, cut, or print, shall be 
copied, and also ail and every sheet thereof so copied or printed, as 
aforesaid, to the proprietor or proprietors of the copy-right th 
shall further forfeit one dollar for every sheet of such map, chart, mu- 
sical composition, print, cut, or engraving, which may be found in his 
or their possession, printed or published, or exposed to sale, contrary 
to the true intent and meaning of this act; the one moiety thereof to 
the proprietor or proprietors, and the other moiety to the use of the 
United States,- to be recovered in any court having competent juris- 
diction thereof. 



&MHOTBE3 mo w%mum 9 iBo ©q 



VICE PROVOST 



Sat : 

It is beyond doubt that English Grammar has been in an un- 
settled state from its commencement to the present period. And al- 
though it is not my design to enumerate the various injurious effects of 
this fugitive state of so important a branch of education; yet it may not 
be improper to remark that one of these results is the frequent change 
which teachers feel justified in making upon a mere possibility of pro- 
curing an improved Grammar. Our schools are almost quarterly dis- 
turbed by the introduction of a new system of prating about nouns, and 
verbs. The people of our eommon country have long felt the bad 
effects of this perpetuity in the change of a book which attempts the 
development of a popular science. Nor can they be ignorant of the 
fact that the unsoundness of the British system of English philology, is 
the primary cause of this alternate adoption, and rejection which have 
for years distracted parents, children, and teachers upon the subject of 
the true structure of their vernacular tongue. I have long been satisfied 
that nothing but a sovereign remedy for the disease of this old British 
theory, can arrest the constant change which the numerous attempts 
to improve this system, enable teachers to make: and I have long 



IV DEDICATION. 

been convinced that this remedy is a full removal of this British work of 
defect, error, absurdity, and contradiction, from our schools, from our 
libraries, and from our affections, by a substitution of a system which can 
be inducted into its place under the sanction of philological truth, and 
under the guardianship of one whose soundness of judgment, depth of 
erudition, and love of country, will induce the learned to examine, 
and others to confide. That pride of opinion, attachment of habit, 
and belief in the adequateness of the British system, will yield at once, 
is an event bordering too much upon a miracle, to be expected in these 
days. On the contrary, should these stern attributes not array them- 
selves against this undertaking, their neutrality would commence a 
new epoch in human nature, and in human events. 

Nothing so effectually prevents improvement as a belief of present 
perfection. It is observed by Mr. Murray that little improvement in 
English Grammar, can be expected at so late a period of the science. 
While, sir, I have ever felt perfectly willing that Mr. Murray should 
enjoy his own opinions on the subject of English phrenody, I have ne- 
ver been inclined so far to participate in his enjoyment as to subscribe 
to their doctrines. The court of chance, condition, or fate, has decid- 
ed that I should meet Mr. Murray in open combat, and withstand him 
page for page. Whether this verdict is to be viewed as the penalty of 
the crime of venturing to differ in opinion from the distinguished 
champion of the British principles of English philology, or whether it 
should be considered an appointment to bring the enslaved child from 
literary bondage, must be solved by time itself which leaves no blank 
in the history of man. Be that as it may, I have yielded to the man- 
date of this tribunal from which it seemed to me, no appeal would lie. 
I had commenced my exposition of the unsoundness of the British 
System, before the private virtues, public worth, and rare learning of 
Mr. Murray, were connected with t he memory of the dead. His exit, 
like that of every great, and good man, has hallowed the works of his 
hands— it has raised his erudition into a monument of fame, which 
will never crumble beneath the pen of the critic, nor suffer from the 
lapse of time. Nor shall my hand be raised to take one particle of 



DEDICATION. * V 

granite from the imperishable pile. But while I wish this memento 
to the fame of a distinguished scholar, to endure without change, T 
rejoice in the rescue of that philological corpse which lay beneath the 
monumental mass of this great man's literary glory. Sir, do I 
seem affected? It is natural that I should feel — the dead body which 
1 have for years toiled to remove from beneath this tower, was a near, 
and dear relative of my vernacular tongue! Having at length made 
the rescue, I have presented under your protection, the lifeless mass 
to my country for reanimation; — her touch can make the dead corpse 
live. And I entreat her not to withhold it — let him that is now dead, 
sit up, and begin to speak — let him teach the tender vines which now 
hang in graceful festoons upon the branches of the tree of science, to 
wind their course up to its celestial summit. Yes, if into our repub- 
lican Eden, this tree has been transplanted, let us not slumber while 
banqueting upon the rich gums which exude from its trunk — rather, 
Jet us beautify its boughs with American flowers, enrich the soil 
where it stands, and sweeten the fruit which it yields. 

May your life be as long as your feelings are generous; may your 
future days be as happy as your past ones have been useful ; and may 
your setting sun be as resplendent, and serene as your earthly career 
has been honorable, and exemplary. 

With feelings of gratitude for the honor of being permitted to sub- 
scribe myself your most obedient, and humble servant. 

THE AUTHOR. 



A2 



APPROVERS OF THE SYSTEM. 



Philadelphia. 

Dr. S. B. Wylie, Professor of Languages in Pennsylvania University. 

Rev. S. W. Crawford, Principal of the Academy connected with the 
University. 

C. J. Ingersoll, Roherts Vaux, Win. Meredith, D. P. Brown, Dr. W. 
C. Brinckle, Dr. A. Comstock, Thomas A. Taylor, Mr. Slack, Mr. 
Goodftllow, David Maclure, Thomas M. Raser, E. Fouse, S. II. Wi!. 
son, Mr. Trego, Mr. Depuy, Mr. Ashton, Mr. Anderson, John Saundcr- 
son, J. M. Duncan, John Erhart, Dr. F. Plummcr, &c. ice. 

Pittsburgh. — R. N.Smith, John M'Nivins, Tliomas II. Harris. 

HarrisbuTg. — James Maginnis, S. Douglass, A. T. Dean, A. L. 
Keagy, J. D. Rupp. 

New York. 

De Witt Clinton, E. Nott, President of Union College; Professor 
Yates, Union College; Rev. Samuel B. Blatchford, Rev. John Chester, 
Rev. C. G. Somers, Rev. D. H. Barnes, Rev. C. Schaeffer, Rev. Solo- 
mon Brown, Rev. D. Parker, C. M. Thayer, Charles Spaulding, L. S. 
Lownsbury. 

Utica.— Charles Bartlett, William Barbour, Euridcre Whiffen, G. 
Comstock, Win. Williams, L. Bayley, E. Ames, (temeken.) 

Ithaca. — Wm. Irving, George C. Freer, M. Baird, G. D. Beers, Isaac 
Day* A. G. Dunning, K. Hulin. Mr. Davis. 

Homer. — Samuel B. Woolworth. 

Cazenovia. — Daniel M'Ewen, Daniel E. Burhans. 

Maryland. 

Rev. John Findlay, James Gould, Mr. Stewart, S. Jones, Mr. Pack- 
ard, J. Dyke, Mr. Mills, Wm. Wiclus, E. Bennett, J. V. Berry, D. H. 
Bingham, David C. Rosco, C. Coleman, J. Brown. 

Mount St Mary's Seminary. — Rev. James Lynch, J. Butler, John 
II. M'Caffery, James Curny, Matthew Taylor, Barnard < >. < 
John M'Clasky, Edward Sourin, Edward Collins, Thomas Butler, (all 
professors.) 

District of Columbia. 

Rev. Thomas Wheat, Benjamin Hallowell, John R. Picrpoint, Mr. 
Allison, C. K. Gardner. 

Kcntuc !;>/. 

S. J. Anderson, James Ilolton, R. Fleming, James Fleming, B. F. 
Reeves. 

(Recommendations at the close of the book.) 



PREFACE. 



Even a superficial observer of human affairs must be satisfied that 
the ease, accuracy, despatch, and safety with which the transactions of 
life are conducted, depend much upon the degree of skill which men 
possess in the use of language. Who has not found that many of the 
difficulties which distract society by setting member against member, 
arise from a want of that skill in language, which is necessary to define 
the conditions of those transactions that lie treasured up in words? It 
becomes every man, and woman, therefore, to understand, critically, 
the language of their own country — and as an incentive to that care- 
ful attention which is necessary to such an understanding, let each 
one reflect upon the advantages of being able to use this instrument 
with ease, propriety, and despatch. 

In the business of life, language is invaluable; how important, then, 
is a correct knowledge of it. In social intercourse, language is dear 
to all; how desirable, then, is that skill which enables one to use it 
with all the ease with which he can move the fingers of his hands. 
In the higher walks of life, language holds an elevated rank; how 
important, then, to the lady, and gentleman, is a refined acquaintance 
with it. And to parents, who should ever superintend the education 
of their children, a philosophic knowledge of language is a blessing 
indeed. 

Nor is it of little importance to this nation, that her youth should 
be early, and thoroughly instructed in the principles of the English 
tongue. Too little stress is laid upon the education of her children. 
Youth is the progressive state of both mind, and body ; and if either 
is neglected here, it never attains that height in excellence to which 
our species are capable of ascending. The proper nourishment for 
both, while in this stale, is generous, and constant action; unci in 



exact proportion to the use of this, will be the strength of the body, 
and the capability of the soul. Children, as such, arc passed by as 
of no real value to a nation — the fact, that from these young saplings 
are soon to be selected the pillars of the country, is rarely considered 
in its proper light, even by the American community. 

Youth is the season designed by nature for the formation of the 
mind— the expansion of the soul. But man, mistaken man, has con- 
tradicted this, and thus brought himself to a state so feeble that he can 
hardiy secure his rights, or enjoy his freedom ! It is not pretended 
that American children are deprived of schools; but it is verily be- 
lieved, that they nearly waste their precious childhood by a false system 
of teaching. Is it too late for reform? If not, let it be commenced in 
the primary schools — let the language be understood by the teachers, 
and by them thoroughly taught to their pupils. Let the institutions 
in which youth complete their education, give attention to their own 
tongue: too much time is devoted to other languages. American 
statesmen must be acquainted with their own language, or this republic 
is of short duration. Even the constitution of the United States can 
not be understood by two impartial statesmen in the same way. 

To the man of circumscribed views, innovation seems to imply a 
contempt for all former systems, and a total want of respect for their 
authors. But, he who has seen the clouds of literary night dissipate 
before the sun of improvement, the region of science grow lighter, and 
lighter, and the horizon of truth extend from time to time, by repeated 
changes, will soon overcome his attachment to absurd forms, and 
gladly promote that species of innovation which tends to build system 
upon truth, and philosophy. 

The author of this work respects the various systems of English 
Grammar: he regards them as so many stepping stones by which the 
science has been brought to its present height of excellence. He re- 
spects their authors as men, and especially as the founders of so grand 
a commencement. He respects the memory of Mr. Murray for the 
good he has done in the Republic of letters. So :',.r from holding his 
shade in contempt, or his work in derision, he would fire his system 



PREFACE. IX 

with the sparks struck from the collision of its conflicting principles; 
he would deposit its ashes in a golden urn, and preserve them as a 
memento of its worth. 

The American Grammar, he is not insensible will oppose the 
wisdom of the learned, and the practice of years. But, it should be 
remembered that systems, the growth of ages, have been overturned, 
and that principles, gray with centuries, have been found a delusive 
chimera. All that relates to man, is matter of progression: we see 
the commencement of Christianity in mere rituals, and symbols : we 
find its perfection in Calvary's Crimsoned Top. 

Are you ready to reject this work because you have been brought 
up at the feet of Murray? remember him who was brought up at 
those of Gamaliel; listen to the cry of the Christians, and be remind- 
ed of Paul's journey to Damascus : education had drawn a film over 
his eyes ; and a miracle was necessary to restore his sight. 

From the dictatorial attitude of the English literati, this production 
may seem an infringement on the rights which they have so long 
claimed, and which this country has too long granted. It is remarked 
by European writers, that English literature should be a model for the 
literati in America, until this country produces a Newton, an Addison, 
&c. We confess a deep regard for the shades of these illustrious 
men: but we would sooner build sepulchres to England's ancient 
prophets, than believe in her living ones. Where can stronger claims 
be laid to philological legislation, than in a country, distinguished for 
freedom and power of speech? 

In the British system of Grammar, the sense is cither lost by the 
use of improper terms, or enveloped in arbitrary rules, definitions, and 
exceptions. Indeed, the whole system resembles a machine, hastily 
contrived, possessing no grand movements ; too complicated, too 
feeble in most of its parts, and, in general, acting upon wrong princi- 
ples. The author of this work, therefore, after mature examination 
of the European, has ventured to introduce new materials, a\h m:\\ 
principles ; and to complete the remedy, he has extended his system 
to the relation of one assemblage of words to another assemblage. 



This work, therefore, is not only made a means for teaching the nitre 
childlike relation of one word to another word, hut an instrument for 
presenting 1 that manly mental, subtle coincidence, vibrating between 
the relative groups of the words, which compose the sentence. This 
part of the American System is called graduation, and treats of 
words in their collective action, their collective bearing, and in their 
collective import — and, while it may be clearly comprehended even 
by the minds of children, it is not unworthy the close attention of 
men, of scholars, of philosophers. Gradiation consists in dividing a 
sentence into portions, or groups, ascertaining their true constructive 
relation, learning their exact significant characters, and referring the 
inferior portions to their respective superiors. This Exercise urges 
the pupil to trace out the precise connection of the portions, by fol- 
lowing the filaments which produce it; and thus fits him to discern 
the exact meaning of any writer whose language he may read. It 
prepares the pupil to read with an understanding which renders 
study easy, delightful, and profitable to him. Gradcation gives the 
pupil such a knowledge of language as qualifies him to acquire the 
other branches of education with an expedition, case, and satisfaction, 
which render study advantageous, and pleasing. Made familiar with 
this process, the pupil's mind kindles into fervor; and he pursues his 
study as much for the pleasure of the i the advantage of 

knowledge. And whether his eye is turned to the si^n of the type, 
or his car directed to the language of the tongue, ho Beizes the period 
with animation, moves along the constructive fibre-- which extend 
from portion to portion, works his passage through the entire sen- 
tence, and comes out with every thing which philosophy can glean, 
or acutencss discern. 

The author of this work is far from desiring to exhibit a mere in- 
dependence of mind in the r. j ction of the Brit of English 
Philology. Nor does he mention the excellence of the American 
Syntax to institute an invidious comparison between the two — he 
does it to prevent an identity witli those essays which have appeared 
within a few years, under the pretensions of improving the method of 



PREFACE. XI 

presenting the erroneous principles upon which the system of Murray 
has been founded. It differs much from all others. 

The American Syntax is a laconic system of English Philology, 
founded upon principles entirely new, and highly important. It settles 
all points contested among teachers — resolves all the difficulties of the 
pupil, and relieves the mind of all its grammatical scruples. It sets 
aside all other systems — exposes their defects, demonstrates the little 
use of attending to them, and presents to the pupil, the unerring and 
only way to the structure of the English language. It urges the 
youthful mind to invention and thought — it undeceives the most ac- 
complished Grammarian, and instructs the most profound Philologist: 
and it is, in a variety of ways and cases, the clergyman's guide in 
scriptural exposition; the lawyer's interpreter in juridical discussion ; 
and the magistrate's confirmation in legal decision. 

Language is an emanation from God. It is the medium of com- 
munication from one finite mind to another, and a means of inter- 
course between man and his Maker. In construction, it is ingenious; 
in purpose, noble; and in application to thought, wonderful. As a 
gift, it claims our gratitude; as a science, it demands our highest at- 
tention; and as a means of mental intercourse, it excites our admira- 
tion and astonishment. 

Language is the mind's hand; and, like that of the body, is employed 
by many who are ignorant of its beautiful symmetry. But they that 
use it without understanding its principles, lose as much as those who 
strengthen their bodies with food which they do not relish. In trac- 
ing this hand through all its changes, and modifications, in under- 
standing their causes, and effects, and in seeing it follow the discursive 
parts of the mind, fasten upon its curiously formed notions, and reach 
them to others, we are led to look for its Origin. 

It has long been a contested point whether language is a divine 
revelation, or a human production. But when we trace it from cause 
to effect, we see more than human agency. Man consists of two 
parts, a body, and a mind ; this is journeying through life in that. 
Thus, the mind becomes a passenger; the body his chariot; ideas his 



baggage ; the earth his inn ; hope his food ; and another world his 
destination. And such is the relation between the passengers while 
on the way that they are compelled to interchange their ideas. For 
this purpose, either God has furnished them with language, a ready 
means for this exchange, or the passengers themselves have made 
this instrument. When we reflect upon the passenger's connection 
with his chariot ; when we see him drawing to himself, through or- 
ganic avenues, the various objects which constantly surround it, we 
feel thut this work is above man — but, when we behold him analys- 
ing these objects, forming correct notions of their component parts, 
and, with vocal organs attached to his vehicle, converting the air into 
sounds fur the communication of those notions, we are ready to ex- 
claim — the Former of the passenger is the Author of his language! 



A LANGUAGE, 

OR 

A PHRENOD. 



A Language, or a Phrenod is that, set of signs, which 
forms the medium of communication from one mind to 
another. 

[Lingua, the tongue.) (Phren, the mind; and odos, a 
means, a medium, a way.) 

REMARKS. 

I. Every nation has found it important to have a phrenod, com- 
posed of sounds, and a phrenod composed of letters. Hence, each na- 
tion has two phrenods; viz. a phon t od, and an alphod. 

(Phone, a voice; and odos, a medium. Alpha, a letter, and odos, a 
means.) 

II. The distinctive name of a phrenod is generally formed from the 
national appellation of the people who use it — hence, the phrase, the 
French phrenod, the Greek phrenod, the English phrenod, &c. 

PHRENODY, OR PHILOLOGY. 

Phrenody is the science of phrenods. 

English phrenody is the science of the English phrenod. 

DIVISION OF PHRENODY. 

Phrenody is divided into two parts; namely, 

1. Syntax, and 

2. Signology. 

1. Syntax is that part of phrenody, which comprises the 
constructive principles of phrenods. 

2. Signology is that part of phrenody, which comprises 
the significant principles of phrenods. 

[Signology is taught by a Dictionary.) 

ENGLISH SYNTAX. 
English Syntax is that part of English phrenody, which 
consists of the constructive principles of the English phre- 
nod. 

B 



14 ENGLISH SYNTAX. 

English Syntax is divided into six parts, viz. 

1. Gnomeology. 

2. Monology, 

3. Syncratology, 

4. Semenology, 

5. Syntithology, and 

G. POEOLOGY. 

I. GNOMEOLOGY. 

Gnomeology is that part of syntax, which consists of the 
doctrine of a gnomod, or sentence. 

II. MONOLOGY. 
Monology is that part of syntax, which consists of the 
doctrine of monos. 

III. SYNCRATOLOGY. 

Syncratology is that part of syntax, which consists ol 
the conjunctive power, and character of words. 

IV. SEMENOLOGY. 

Semenology is that part of syntax, which respects tin 
power of a word to distinguish those things to which thi 
Dictionary meaning of the word does not apply. 

V. SYNTITHOLOGY. 

Syntithology is that part of syntax, which consists ol 
the principles of putting words together in the formation of 
gnoinods, or sentences. 

VI. POEOLOGY. 

Poeology is that part of syntax, which consists of the 
principles of forming words. 



Note. — The terms used in this work, are explained, and pronounced 
in the Verbatory affixed to the Syntax. 



GNOMEOLOGY. 15 



PART I. 



CHAPTER I. 



GNOMEOLOGY. 



Gnomeology is that part of syntax, which consists of the 
doctrine of a gnomod, or sentence. 

Ji gnomod, or sentence. 

A gnomod, or sentence, is an assemblage of two, or more 
words, which expresses a cor diction; as, 

1. It is nine. 

2. If it is nine. 

3. Is it nine? 

4. Go thou to school. 

5. Forgive thou our sins. 

A gnomod consists of two things; namely, words, and a 
cor 'diction; as, " It is nine." 

1. The words are a frame-work of pointers, each pointing 
to something on which the cordiction has a near, or a remote 
bearing. 

2. The cordiction is the abstract affirmation, the abstract 
nutation, the abstract interrogation, the abstract command, 
or the abstract petition which is expressed in the assem- 
blage of words; as, " It is nine, If it is nine, Is it nine? 
Go thou to school, Forgive thou our sins." 

PARTS OF A GNOMOD. 

A gnomod is divided into two parts, viz. a gnometory , 
and an agnometory. 

1. The gnometory is that portion within which the cor- 
diction lies; as, 

1. // is nine. 

2. If it is nine. 

3. Is it nine? 

4. Go thou to school. 

5. Forgive thou our sins. 



16 GNOMEOLUGY. 

2. The agnometory is that part within which no cordic- 
tion lies; as, 

1. It is nine. 

2. If it is nine. 

3. Is it nine? 

4. Go thou to school. 

5. Forgive thou our sins. 

Note. — It may be proper to remark that the gnometory of a gno- 
mod, can comprise neither fewer, nor more than two words. It must 
comprise two because the cordictiun is produced by the joint agency 
of two — and it can never have more than two because no more than 
two can exert any influence in the production of the mere cordiction 
of the sentence. Hence, in the gnomod, "John was taught by hi> 
brother," John, with was constitutes the gnometory, the place, the 
part within which the cordiction of the whole assemblage of words 
lies. "John was" is not the entire frame- work; but it is that part of 
the frame-work, which produces the cordiction, the affirmation. 

Again. — If John writes, seems to be an instance of a gnometory 
which has three words. But when it is considered that it is the 
characteristic mark of a nutation to leave the mind in doubt with 
respect to the thing in question, it will be seen that John, with writes 
is the gnometory. If is calculated to make the mind totter with re- 
spect to what is mentioned — and " John writes" leaves the mind in this 
tottering state. From a hasty examination, it may seem that if ex- 
presses the nutation. The nutation, however, is expressed by those 
words that express the thing about which the mind totters, or doubts. 
If expresses nothing concerning which the mind totters — the mind 
totters with respect to Johu , s icritino-. And, as "John writes," ex- 
presses this thing, and leaves the mind tottering concerning it, "John 
writes" is a nutation. — If it was the province of a nutation to cause 
the mind to totter, if would be a perfect nutation. It is the province 
of a nutation to express the thing concerning which the mind totter* 
without relieving the mind of its doubts. 

QUESTIONS. 

1. What is language, or phrenod! 

2. "What are the two phrenods called which every na- 
tion has found il important to have! 

3. How is the distinctive name of a phrenod generally 
formed? 

4. What is phrenody, or philology! 

5. What is English phrenody? 

6. How is phrenody divided? 

7. What is syntax? 

8. What is signology? 



GNOMEOLOGY. 17 

9. What is English syntax? 

10. Into how many parts is English syntax divided? 

11. Can you give the name of each part?. 

12. What is gnomeology? 

13. What is a gnomod, or sentence? 

14. Of how many things does a gnomod consist? 

15. What are the words? 
1G. What is the cordiction? 

17. Into how many parts is a gnomod, or sentence di- 
vided? 

18. What is a gnometory? 

19. Which part is the gnometory in the first example? 

20. What is an agnometory? 

21. Can you give the agnometory in each example under 
the definition of an agnometory? 

22. Of how many words must the gnometory consist? 

23. Can the gnometory have more than two words? No. 
Why not? Because only two words can be concerned in 
the production of the cordiction. 

QUESTIONS, 

Preparatory to gnomodical exercises. 

1. What does the word, Cordiction, mean? 
Affirmation, interrogation, command, petition, and nu- 
tation. 

2. W T hence the propriety of calling these distinctive at- 
tributes, Cordiction? 

From the fact that these five attributes are the vital parts 
of speech, or diction. 

3. Can an assemblage of words be a sentence, which has 
not one of these vital properties? No. Why? Because 
affirmation, interrogation, and nutation of something, or 
command, and petition to some being, are the only purposes 
which men have in forming sentences. The assemblage of 
words, therefore, which has not one of these purposes, is 
not a sentence. 

4. Is the following assemblage of words a sentence? — 
'« Unto the mount of Olives" 

No. Why not? Because it has no cordiction. That 
is, it does not contain affirmation, interrogation, command, 
petition, or nutation. 

b2 



18 GNOMEOLOGY. 

5. Is the following assemblage a sentence? — They went. 
Yes. Why? Because it contains a cordiction. What 

is the cordiction which it contains? Affirmation. 

6. What is the cordiction of the following sentence? — 
Jire you well? 

The cordiction, or heart of this assemblage of words, i^ 
interrogation. 

SPECIMEN'. 

" Of Olives" not a sentence, because it contains no cor- 
diction. 

" He is in Philadelphia" a sentence, because it contains 
a cordiction which is an affirmation. 

M Give us this day our daily bread" a sentence, because 
it contains a cordiction which is a petition. 

EXERCISES IN GNOMEOLOGY. 

1. Law, in its most comprehensive sense, is a rule ol 
action. 

2. Law, in its most confined sense, is a rule of human 
action. 

3. Man is a dependent being. 

4. On the laws of nature, and revelation, depend all 
human laws. 

5. The law of nations is that collection of principles, 
which regulates the intercourse between national commu- 
nities. 

6. The work improperly. 

7. Is the work properly done? 

8. If John returns to-day. (Nutation.) 

9. Were any philosophers more eminent than Socrates, 
and Plato? 

10. Forgive our sins. 

11. Pardon our iniquities. 

12. The mind of man not without some food to nourish 
the activity of its thoughts. 

13. My good boy. 

More exercises may be found uuder page 20, 2 
27, 31, and 35. 



MONOLOGY. 19 

PART. II. 

CHAPTER I. 

MONOLOGY. 

Monology is that part of syntax, which consists of the 
doctrine of monos. 

A mono. 

A mono is that word, or that number of words, which 
can be passimated alone; as, [There was a marriage'] (in 
Carta) (of Galilee.) 

MONOLOGICAL RULES. 

I. An assemblage of two, or more words, having an inde- 
pendent word for its base, constitutes a distinct mono; as, 
[There was a marriage] (in Cana) (of Galilee.) 

II. The single independent word which expresses a cir- 
cumstance, constitutes a mono; as (Ah,) (John,) [have you 
come again?] 

SPECIMEN. 

1. [There was a marriage] (in Cana) (of Galilee.) 

" There teas a marriage,''' 

A mono. Rule 1. An assemblage of two, or more words, 

having an independent word for its base, is a mono; as, 

There ivas a marriage. Marriage is the independent word . 

"in Cana, 11 

A mono. Rule 1. 

" of Galilee.'''' 
A mono. Rule 1. 

2. (*« Ah,) (John,) [have you come again?"] 

Ah, 
A mono. Rule 2. 

John, 
A mono. Rule 2. 

have you come again, 
A mono. Rule 1. You is the independent word. 



20 ORDER OF MONOS. 

3. .(James,) [will you come] (to me,) (my boy.) 

James, 
A mono. Rule 2. 

will you come, 
A mono. Rule 1. 

to me, 
A mono. Rule 1. 

my boy, 
A mono. Rule 1. 

EXERCISES IN MONOLOGY, 

To be monoized exactly according to the preceding spe- 
cimen. 

1. Hearken , unto me, my people. [Three 
monos.) 

2. O, Jerusalem, awake thou, and stand , up. (4 
M.) 

3. Give , ear unto me, O, my nation. (4 M. 

4. My Lords, 1 am opposed to this bill. (3 M.) 

5. Behold thou, the Lord's hand is not shortened: he 
can still save , . (3 M.) 

6. They were known to return. (1 M.) 

7. They were known on their return. (2 JM.) 

8. They write , accurately. (1 M.) 

9. They write , with accuracy. (2 M.) 

10. They came at that time. (2 M.) 

11. That , which we, lor our unworthiness, are 
afraid to crave, our prayer is that God, for the worthiness 
of his Son, would vouchsafe to grant. (6 M.) 

More exercises may be found under page 18, 23, 25, "2? 
31, and 35. 



CHAPTER II. 



ORDER OF MONOS. 



Monos are divided into two orders upon the principle of 
their frame-work rank in a gnomod, or sentence. These arc 



ORDER OF MONOS. 21 

1. Gnomecorme, and 

2. Clad. 

1. The gnomecorme is the foundational, the trunk mono 
in a gnomod, or sentence; as, [There was a marriage] (in 
Cana) (of Galilee.) 

Note. — The gnomecorme bears the same sustaining relation to the 
clad in the frame-work of a sentence, which the trunk bears to the 
branches in the frame-work of a tree. 

2. The clad is a branch mono; as, [There was a mar- 
riage] (in Cana) (of Galilee.) 

Note. — The clads bear the same relation to the gnomecorme, in the 
frame-work of the sentence, which the branches bear to the trunk, in 
the frame-work of a tree. 

RULES. 

1. That mono which is so disposed of in the gnomodic 
frame-work as to become the foundation of the sentence, is 
the gnomecorme; as, [There was a marriage] (in Cana) 
(of Galilee.) 

2. That mono which is so disposed of in the sentence, 
as to have a frame-work dependence upon another mono, is 
a clad; as, [There was a marriage] (in Cana) (of Galilee,) 
(M,) (Jofm,) have you come again? 

REMARKS. 

The first rule is a sort of definition — it tells you that the gnome- 
corme is the basis in the frame-work of a sentence; as, [Jesus saic a 
man] (that was blind) (from his birth.) [" Jesus saw a 7nan."] 

The second rule is also a sort of definition, for it informs you that 
a clad is a mono having a frame-work dependence upon another mono: 
as, [Jesus saw a man] (who was blind) {from Ids birth.) 

^, , S who was blind ) 
Uuds ) from his birth. \ 

The first clad subjoins to the gnomecorme the circumstance of the 
man's blindness. The second clad subjoins to the first clad the cir- 
cumstance of the time during which the circumstance of his blindness 
had continued — (who was blind) (from his birth.) 

Let me here put you somewhat on your guard respecting rules, and 
definitions. You must understand them, or have no benefit from 
them. And to understand them, you must, in reading them, pause &1 
each word in each mono, and at each mono in eacli sentence. Lei 
me then call vour attention to these rules again; 



W ORDER OF MONOS. 

1. That mono which is so disposed of in the verbal 
frame-work as to become the foundation of the sentence, is 
the gnomecorme; as, Joseph went to the city; James to 
the country. [Joseph ivent.~] 

2. That mono which is so disposed of in the sentence as 
to have a frame-work dependence upon another mono, is a 
clad; as, Joseph went (to the city;) {James went) (to the 
country.) 

You should give close attention to the phrase ".so dis- 
posed of." The gnomecorme may, by a different dispo- 
sition in the frame-work, become a clad; and a clad may in 
the same way become the gnomecorme; as, [James went] 
(to the city,) {Joseph , ) (to the country,) 

[I say the truth] (in Christ;) (I lie not:) (my conscience 
also bearing ( , me) witness) (in the Holy Ghost.) 

[I lie not;] (I say the truth) (in Christ;) (my conscience 
also bearing ( , me) witness) (in the Holy Ghost.) 

Few sentences, however, can undergo that revolution in 
the manner of their frame-work, which is necessary to turn 
the gnomecorme into a clad, and a clad into the gnome- 
corme, without a very obvious change in the sense itself. 
And when the change in structure gives a new sense, the 
old sentence is entirely lost in the new. 

In the following the gnomecorme, cannot become a mere 
clad — 

"(To him) (that worketh) [is the reward not reckoned] 
(of grace,) (but , , , ) (of debt.") 

how the GNOMECORME may be distinguished from 

THE CLADS. 

No sentence has more than one clad, of which potential 
precession can be predicated — and there are very many 
sentences in which no clad can occupy the first place; as, 
But one thing is needful; (and Mary hath chosen that good 
part) (which shall not be taken away) (fro in her.) 

As there is but one clad which can occupy the first place 
in any sentence; and as the gnomecorme always can, it 
follows that the gnomecorme is one of the two bhmkm 
which can commence the sentence; as, (//? // 
[was the ivord;] and the word was with God, and the word 
was God. 

(In the beginning,) and [was the word] are the only 



RELATIONS OF THE CLADS. 23 

monos with which the verse can be commenced; hence it 
follows that one of these is the gnomecorme. 

EXERCISES. 

Specimen. Canst thou draw out Leviathan with a hook? 

1. Canst thou draw out Leviathan, The gnomecorme. 
Rule 1. (Read the Rule.) 

with a hook, a clad. Rule 2. 

2. Hearken , unto me, O, my people, {ye.) 
Hearken ye, the gnomecorme. Rule 1. 

unto me, a clad. Rule 2. 

O, a clad. Rule 2. 

my people, a clad. Rule 2. 

1. He was led up of the Spirit. (2 M.) 

2. And the house was filled with the odor of the oint- 
ment. (3 M.) 

3. And she wiped his feet with her hair. (2 M.) 

4. By grace are ye saved ( , , ) through faith. 

(4 M.) 

5. I can write better , with a pen than , 

, , , with a pencil. (4 M.) 

6. Aud they cried out with a loud voice. (2 M.) 

7. He lived in London , a year. (3 M.) 

8. On Friday last, we launched the ship. (2 M.) 

9. He went from his teachers to his books. (3 M.) 
10. He wrote these letters on last evening, in my pre- 
sence, on that table, with his pencil. (5 M.) 

N. B. Should more exercises be deemed necessary they 
may be found under page 18, 20, 25, 27, 31, and 35. 



CHAPTER III. 



RELATIONS OF THE CLADS. 

The relation of a clad respects the number of monos to 
which it stands conjected in construction. Clads have two 
relations, viz. Uni, and Plus. 



24 RELATIONS OF THE CLADS. 

That clad which, in the frame-work of a sentence, de- 
pends upon only one other mono, is of the unirelation; as, 
[John is the hrother] (of James.) 

2. That clad which, in the frame-work of a sentence, 
depends upon more than one other mono, is of the plusre- 
lation; as, [John is the brother] (of James;) (but he is not 
the brother) (of Nathaniel.) 

CONJECTIVE READING. 

Conjective Reading is the process of conjecting the in- 
ferior mono to its superior mono, or monos. 

[There was a marriage] (in Cana) (of Galilee.) 

"in Carta, a clad, unirelation, belonging to its superior 
mono. Conjective Reading. There was a marriage in 
Cana. 

" of Galilee" a clad, unirelation, belonging to its superior 
mono. Conjective Reading, (in Cana) (of Galilee.) 

RULES. 

1. Every clad of the unirelation must be conjected lo 
that mono which sustains it in the frame-work of the sen- 
tence. 

2. Every clad of the plusrelation must be conjected to 
those monos which sustain it in the frame-work of the sen- 
tence. 

SPECIMEN IN MONOLOGY. 

"In the beginning was the word; and the word was 
with God; and the word was God." 

Was the word, 

The gnomecorme. 

in the beginning, 

A clad, unirelation, belonging to its superior mono. 
Conjective Reading. The word was in the beginning. 
Rule 1. 

and the word was, 

A clad, plusrelation, belonging to its superior mono. 
Conjective Reading. [The word was] (in the beginning;; 
(and the word was.) Rule 2. 



RELATIONS OF THE CLADS. 25 

with God, 

A clad, nnirelation, belonging to its superior mono. 
Conjective Reading, (and the word was) {with God.) 
Rule 1. 

and the word was God, 

A clad, plusrelation, belonging to its superior monos. 
Conjective Reading, (and the word was) (with God;) (and 
the word ivas God.) Rule 2. 



1. In the following prepared exercises, every line con- 
stitutes a niono. 

2. The first line in every sentence is the conne. 

3. The Conjective Reading is indicated by correspond- 
ing letters; as, a a, which are placed at the close of the 
superior mono, and at the commencement of the inferior; 
as, 

The word was a 
a in the beginning. 

Conjected thus: The word was a a in the beginning. 

4. The plusrelation of a mono is indicated by placing 
the same letters before the inferior, which accompany its 
several superiors; as, 

The word was a 
a in the beginning; 
a a and the word was. 

Conjected thus: The word was a a in the beginning; a a 
and the word was. 

PREPARED EXERCISES. 

1 . The eyes a are b* 
a of a fool 
b in the ends c 
c of the earth. 

* The inferior mono should be introduced where the conjective let- 
ter stands in the superior. 

c 



26 DIVISION OF THE CLADS. 

2. The most powerful motives call a, o 
a on us 

b for those efforts c 

c which our common country demands d 
d of all her children. 

3. Nature has so exquisitely modelled the human fea- 
tures a 

a , , , that b 

b they are capable c 

c of the expression d 

d of the most secret emotions e 

e of the soul. 

4. The rapid extension a, b may be considered a direct 
proof d. 

a of the Christian religion 
b through the principal nations c 
c of the world, 
d of the reality e 
c of the miraclesy 
f of our Saviour, 

d d and ,,,,,,, g 
g of the miraculous powers h 
h with which i 
i the apostles themselves were endowed. 

More Exercises may be found under page 18, 'J<». 23, 
27, 31, and 35. 






CHAPTER IV. 

DIVISION OF THE CLADS. 

The clads from their gnomodic character, or from a want 
of this character, are divided into gnomechuh, and agnom* 
clads. 

1. A gnomeclad is one which, while it aids in comple- 
ting the frame-work of a sentence, has a gnomodic charac- 
ter; as, [He went;] {but he did not remain.) 



DIVISION OF THE CLADS. 27 

2. An agnomeclad is one which, while it aids in com- 
pleting the frame-work of a sentence, has, in itself, no gno- 
modic character; as, [He went] (to Boston;) (but he did 
not remain there.) 



1. Every clad with which not can be incorporated, is a 
j-nomeclad; as, [John went] (for his book) (ivhich he ob- 
tained.) 

Note. — If not is put into the clad, which he obtained, it will attach 
itself to obtained, and thus become a member of this mono — which he 
obtained not. 

2. Every clad with which not cannot be incorporated, is 
an agnomeclad; as, [John went] (for his book.) 

Note. — Not cannot be incorporated with the clad, for his book, for 
as soon as it is put into the sentence, it incorporates itself with the 
gnomecorme by attaching itself to went; as, John went not for his 
book, 

SPECIMEN. 

[" John went] (for his book) (which he obtained.") 
"John went" the gnomecorme. 

The gnomecorme is the foundation mono in the frame- 
work of a gnomod; as, John went. 

"for his book" an agnomeclad, unirelation, belonging to 
its superior mono. Conjective Reading. John went for 
his book. Rule 2. 

"ivhich he obtained ," a gnomeclad, unirelation, belonging 
to its superior mono. Conjective Reading, for his book 
which he obtained. Rule 1. 

EXERCISES. 

1. He that makes his fire of hay, hath much smoke, but 
little heat. 

He hath much smoke a 
a that makes his fire b 
b of hay c 
a but , , little heat. 

2. Joseph forgave his brethren, because he was a merciful 
man. 



40 DIVISION OF THE CLADS. 

Joseph forgave his brethren a 
a because he was a merciful man. 

3. Rejoice in the Lord, O ye righteous, for praise is 
comely to the upright. 

b Rejoice , a, c, e 
a in the Lord 
bO 
c ye d 

d , , righteous; 

e for praise is comely f 
f to the upright. 

4. Shall mortal man be more just than God? 

Shall mortal man be more just a 
a than God , ? 

5. A certain man planted a vineyard; and set a hedge 
about it; and digged a place for the wine vat; and built a 
tower; and let it out to husbandmen; and went into a far 
country. 

A certain man planted a vineyard a 
a and , set a hedge 6, b 
b about it 

b and , digged a place c 
c for the wine vat 
c and , built a tower d 
d and , let it out e 
e to husbandmen 
e and , went/ 
/into a far country. 

Should more exercises be deemed necessary, they may 
be found under page 18, 20, 23, 31, and 35. 



STATE, AND COURSE OF MONOS. 29 



CHAPTER V. 

STATE, AND COURSE OF MONOS. 
The states of a mono are 

1. Plenary, and 

2. Implenary, 

3. Broken, and 

4. Unbroken. 

1. The plenary state is that which arises from that de- 
cree of mines?, which admits of solution without supply- 
ing words; as, [Give thou an apple] (to me.) 

2. The implenary state is that which arises from a want 
of one, or more words; as, [Give , ( , me) an 
apple.] 

3. The broken state is that which arises from a division 
of one mono by the intervention of some other mono; as, 
[Law (in its general sense) is a rule] (of action. [Law 
( ) is a rule."] 

4. The unbroken state is that which arises from a con- 
tinuity of all the parts of the mono; as, [Law is a rule'] 
(of action.) 

Note. — Some gnomecormes, as well as some gnomeclads, are indi- 
visible. And the agnomeclads are almost all indivisible. 

II. 

The course of a mono respects that direction which is 
given to it by the position of the words which constitute it. 
The courses are three; namely, Direct, Oblique, and Cir- 
cumflex. 

1. The direct course is that which begins, and ends in 
the same line; as, [There was a man] (in Cesarea,) (whose 
name was Cornelius.) 

2. The oblique course is that which begins in one 
line, and ends in another; as, [There was a man] (in 
Gesarea) (whose name was Cornelius.) 

3. The circumflex course is that which, from the peculiar 
position of the words in the mono, is somewhat like a cir- 

c2 



30 STATE, AND COURSE OF MONOS. 

cumflex; as, [And, when (much people were gathered to- 
gether,) he spake] (unto them) (by parables.) 

[And lie spake ivhe?i.~] 

Note. — As, (when it denotes lime) when, whenever, before, and after 

indicate the circumflex course. In the above case you start from And; 
whence you proceed to lie, and spake which you carry to the place 
whence you started, where you put them between and, and when. In 
the circumflex course as, when, or after is in all cases the last word in 
the mono. 



[" And when (much people were gathered together.) he 
spake] (unto them) (by parables.") 

" Jlnd he spake when,'" 

A plenary broken gnomecorme, circumflex, course. 

" much people were gathered together." 

A plenary unbroken gnomeclad, direct course, unirela- 
tion, belonging to its superior mono. Conjective Read- 
ing. [And he spake when] [much people were gathered 
together") 

" unto them" 

A plenary unbroken agnomeclad, direct course, unirela- 
tion, belonging to its superior mono. Conjective Reading. 
[And he spake [unto them) when] 

Note. — Observe that when takes a post position in this Conjective 
Reading. 

"by parables,"" 

A plenary unbroken agnomeclad, direct course, unirela- 
tion, belonging to its superior mono. Conjective Reading. 
("And he spake (by parables) when] 

PREPARKD EXBBCMl B, 

Let the pupil supply every implied word as he read* his 
mono. 



SYNCRATOLOGY. 31 

[Give , ( , me) such , ] (as I purchased;) (and 

, , as much , ) (as I purchased;) and I shall be 
satisfied.) 

[Do , the job] (in such a manner) (as will please 
him;) (and he will give ( , you) as many dollars) (as 
will pay you well) (for your trouble.) 

[Such , (as I have,) I will give] (unto thee.) 

[No such thing was ever declared] (as he seems to re- 
collect.) 

( . Much) (as man desires) [a little will answer.] 

[As (Jesus passed by) he saw a man] (that was blind) 
(from his birth.) 

[As long (as I am) (in the world,) I am the light] (of the 
world.) 

He was good] (as well as , , rich.) 

"They came] (as pupils) (to my school.) 

"I must not use another's book when] (I have one) (of 
my own.) 

[They accommodate one another daily.] 

[Give , ( , James) another apple.] 

[The interest (of another , ) is not as dear] (to me) 
(as my own , , .) 

[I claim this one] (for my own , ) — (but another , 
claims it) (as another's , .) 

[This day suits my interest;] (another , may suit 
another's , better) (than this , , , , .) 

[Any interest (except my own , ) is another's , .] 

For additional exercises, turn to page 18, 20, 23, 25, 27, 
and 35. 



PART III. 

CHAPTER I. 

SYNCRATOLOGY. 

Syncratology is that part of syntax, which teaches the 
conjunctive characters of individual words. 



32 SYNCRATOLOGY. 

DIVISION OF SYNCRATOLOGY. 

Syncratology is divided into three parts; namely, 

1. Epoage, 

2. Senteology, and 

3. Syncladelogy.* 

I. EP-O-AGE. 

Ep-o-age is that part of syncratology, which respects 
the frame-work rank, or order of words. 

II. SEN-TE-OL-O-GY. 

Senteology is that part of syncratology, which respects 
the gnomodic, and the want of the gnomodic power in the 
words of a gnomod, or sentence. 

III. syn-cla-de-ol-o -gy. 

Syncladeology is that part of syncratology, which re- 
spects the doctrine, or principles of that frame-work con- 
nection which clades have with other words. 



PART I.— CHAPTER I. 

EP-O-AGE. 

Epoage is that part of syncratology, which respects the 
frame-work order, the rank of the words in a mono. 

ORDER. 

The order of a word respects its frame-work rank in* the 
mono. 

There are two orders; namely, 

1. Corme, or Noun, and 

2. Clade. 

Note. — This division of words is founded upon the trunk, and the 
branch relation of the words in the frame-work of a mono. 

* Pronounced, Ep-o-age, Sen-tc-ol-o.gy, Syn-cla-de-ol-o-gy. 



RANK, AND RELATION OF THE CLADES. 33 
I. CORME. 

The corme, or noun is a foundation word in the frame- 
work of a mono; as, \_He went] (unto the mount) (of Olives.) 

Remark. — What the trunk is to its brandies in the frame-work of 
a tree, the corme, or noun is to the clades in the frame-work of a mono. 

II. CLADE. 

The clade is a word which has a branch dependence 
upon another word; as, [He then went~] (unto the Mount 

(of Olives.) 

Remark. — What the branches are to the trunk, in the frame-work 
of a tree, the clades are to the corme in the frame-work of a mono. 
As some branches hold a direct relation to the trunk, so some clades 
hold a direct relation to the corme; as, [He then went] (unto the 
Mount) (of Olives.) 

And as some branches hold an indirect, or remote connection to the 
trunk, but a direct, or close one to another branch, so some clades hold 
an indirect, or remote connection to the corme, but a direct, or close 
one to another clade; as, He then went. 



CHAPTER II. 

RANK, AND RELATION OF THE CLADES. 

The rank of a clade respects its near, or remote connec- 
tion to the corme. There are six ranks. They are mark- 
ed in the prepared exercises in word conjection, 1, 2, 3, 4, 
5, 6. 

I. ILLUSTRATION. 

1 

Cold weather. 
2 1 
Too cold weather. 
3 2 1 
Much too cold weather. 
4 3 2 1 
Very much too cold weather. 



34 RANK, AND RELATION OF THE CLADES. 

II. ILLUSTRATION. 

1 
cold weather, A clade of the first rank, belonging 
to weather. 
2.1 1 

too cold weather, A clade, two constructive degrees 
from weather, and one from cold. 
3.2.1 2.1 1 

much too cold weather, A clade, three constructive degrees 
from weather, two from cold, and 
one from too. 
4.3.2.1 3.2.1 2.1 1 

very much too cold weather, A clade, four constructive degrees 
from weather, three from cold, two 
from too, and one from much. 
5.4.3.2.1.4.3.2.1. 3.2.1. 2.1. 1 

this boy's mother's father's brother's son, A clade, five constructive 

degrees from son, four 
from brother's, three 
from father's, two from 
7nother , s, and one from 
boy's. 

2. The relations of a clade respect the number of words 
to which the clade belongs. There are two relations, viz. 
Uni, and Plus. 

1. The unirelation respects one frame- work connection 
which a clade holds with a corme; as, cold water. 

2. The plusrelation respects more than one frame-work 
connection which a clade holds with two, or more cormes; 
as, He drank water. 

WORD CONNECTION. 

Word Conjection is an exercise which is founded on 
epoagicai principles. 

EPOAGICAL RULES. 

1. Every clade of the first rank must be conjected to the 
corme, or cormes which sustain it in the frame-work of the 
mono. 

2. Every clade of the second rank must be conjected to 
the clade of the first, which sustains it in the frame-work 
of the mono. 

3. Every clade of the third rank must be conjected to the 



RANK, AND RELATION OF THE CLADES. 35 

clade of the second, which sustains it in the frame-work of 
the mono. 

4. Every clade of the fourth rank must be conjected to 
the clade of the third, which sustains it in the frame-work 
of the mono. 

5. Every clade of the fifth rank must be conjected to the 
clade of the fourth, which sustains it in the frame- work of 
the mono. 

7. Every clade belonging to a mono, is of the first rank, 
and must be_conjected to the mono which sustains it in 
the frame-work of the gnomod; as, he went, because (he 
was called.) 

Note. — The plusrelation is confined to clades of the first rank. 

SPECIMEN." 

1 14 3 2 1 

The fire is very much too hot. 

The, a clade, first rank, unirelation, belonging to fire. Conjectivt 

Reading, the fire. Rule 1. 
fire, a corme, or noun. 
is, a clade, first rank, unirelation, belonging to Jive. Conjective 

Reading, fire is. Rule 1. 
very, a clade, fourth rank, belonging to much. Conjective Reading. 

very much. Rule 4. 
much, a clade, third rank, belonging to too. Conjective Reading. 

much too. Rule 3. 
too, a clade, second rank, belonging to hot. Conjective Reading. 

too hot. Rule 2. 
hot, a clade, first rank, unirelation, belonging to fire. Conjective 

Reading, hot fire. Rule 1. 

PREPARED EXERCISES. 
2 1 

Coal black cloth. 

2 1 

Strikingly green trees. 

1 13 2 1 

This fact is very well known. 

2 1 

Grayish blue cloth. 

1^1 1 1 1 1 

Those, fine, beautiful, young, green, straight trees. 



36 RANK, AND RELATION OF THE CLADES. 
4 3 2 1 

How very fast James walks. 
13 2 1 

I am most completely disappointed. 

4 3 2 1" 
Very much too cold weather. 

1 14 3 2 1 

The weather is very much too warm. 

~1 2 1 

He is a very learned man. 

1 _ 1 1 
John will be a good scholar. 

1 1 

Cold, dark nights. 

2 1 
Marble ware house. 

2 1 

Cloud capt towers. 

1 14 3 2 1 

The tea is six pounds too heavy. 

1 14 3 2 1 

That wall is sixteen feet too high. 

1 12 4 3 2 1 

The tea is full six pounds too heavy. 

1 14 3 2 1 

The tea is very much too heavy. 

1 1*2 4 321 

That wall is nearly sixteen hands too high. 

1 14 3 2 1 

The armv is ten thousand men strong. 

1 14 3 2 1 

The distance is very much too long. 

1 2 ^ 

They can not write letters. 

Every clade of the second rank must belong to on» 
first; hence, where there are iwo of the first, the sense 
must decide to which of the two the clade of the * 
belongs. In the above example, there are two of the first — 
ran, and write. And the question is, to winch of these two. 
not belongs. It is the province of not to deny the power, 
or ability to do the act of writing. And to lead'the mind 



RANK, AND RELATION OF THE CLADES. 37 

to this sense of the expression, not has a figure over it 
corresponding in size to that over can. Not, and never 
almost always belong to the clade which falls on the left 
hand. 

2 111 1 13^ 

[John then went] (for his book;) (but* he did not get it.) 
1 2 _ 
I have not written letters. 

12^1 
He would not learn his lesson. 

~ 1 
He planted a vineyard. 

^ 1 1 2 * 

[He is a lad] (whom you may not know.) 

I 12^1 

Idle children will not learn their books. 

II 13 13 3 

This large book has been written long since. 

1 1 3 3 * 1 

These boys have not been writing their copies. 

1 3 1 
We have been laughing. 

1 2 1 
You have been walking. 

13 2 1 

We shall have been walking. 
Coal black cloth. 
Strikingly green trees. 
The fact is very well known. 
Grayish blue cloth. 

i 12 2-1 

These boys have not been writing their copies. 

1 2 1 

We have been laughing. 

v J 2 1 

iou have been walking. 

13 2 1 

We shall have been walking. 

* But, a clade belonging to its own mono. Rule 7. 



38 



RANK, AND RELATION OF THE CLADES. 



Unprepared Exercises in Word Conjection, 

The distance is very much loo long. 

His father was very much pleased. 

Very much too cold weather. 

Coal black cloth. 

Strikingly green trees. 

This fact is very well known. 

Grayish blue cloth. 



Peter 


made 


Samuel's 


shoes* 


Samuel 


cut 


Peter's 


hand. 


Lucy 


knits 


men's 


mittens 


Sally 


makes 


ladies' 


clothes. 


Julia 


studies 


Murray's 


works. 


Harriet 


read 


Homer's 


Iliad. 


Men 


built 


Solomon's 


temple. 



Moses smote the rock. 
Charles was taught. 
Letters are written. 
James taught Charles. 



Charles has written letters. 
Nancy is laughing. 
John laughs. 
Does David walk? 



1. Behind, that, very fine tree. 

2. In very much too cold weather. 

3. In that, very, new house. 

4. In, that, very, new house. 

5. Of coal black, broad cloth. 

6. Into that man's quite new hat. 

7. With this boy's mother's father's son. 

8. With very old, pure, Holland Gin. 

9. With fiery red, East India, fine silk hats. 

10. For Mr. Cooke's very hard apples. 

11. On a wall sixteen hands too high. 

12. On, a, sixteen hands too high wall. 



SPECIMEN UNDER RULE 7. 

" And her spirit came again; 

and she arose straightway; 

and he commanded them to give meat to her.' 



RANK, AND RELATION OF THE CLADES. 30 

And, a clade, first rank, unirelation, belonging to its own 
mono. Conjective Reading. And her spirit came 
again. Rule 7. 

her, a clade, first rank, unirelation, belonging to spirit. 
Conjective reading, her spirit. Rulel. 

spirit, a corme, or noun. 

came, a clade, first rank, unirelation, belonging to spirit. 
Conjective Reading, spirit came. Rule 1. 

again, a clade, second rank, belonging to came. Conjective 
Reading, came again. Rule 2. 

and, a clade, first rank, unirelation, belonging to its own 
mono. Conjective Reading, and she arose straight- 
way. Rule 7. 

she, a corme, or noun. 

arose, a clade, first rank, unirelation, belonging to she. 
Conjective Reading, she arose. Rule 1. 

straightway, a clade, second rank, belonging to arose. Con- 
jective Reading, arose straightway. Rule 2. 

and, a clade, first rank, unirelation, belonging to its own 
mono. Conjective Reading, and he commanded 
them to give meat. Rule 7. 

lie, a corme, or noun. 

commanded, a clade, first rank, plusrelation, belonging to he, 
and them. Conjective Reading, he commanded 
them. Rule 1. 

them, a corme, or noun. 

to, a clade, second rank, belonging to give. Conjective 
Reading, to give. Rule 2. 

give, a clade, first rank, plusrelation, belonging to them, and 
meat. Conjective Reading, them give meat. 
Rule 1. 

meat, a corme, or noun. 

to, a clade, first rank, unirelation, belonging to her. Con- 
jective Reading, to her. Rulel. 

her, a corme, or noun. 



Note 1. It frequently happens that one, or more words of the mono 
to which and, or, nor, neither, as well as, and some others belong, 
are understood; as, A certain man planted a vineyard, and set a hedge. 
In such cases the implied words must always be supplied; as, and h* 
set a hedge. 



40 



RANK, AND RELATION OF THE CLADES. 



He saw John, and Joseph. That is, He saw John; and he sate Jo- 
seph. 

They heard of James, and of his brother. That is, they heard of 
James; and they heard of his brother. 

Note 2. The words which are put together in the same line, arc 
frequently taken together as one clade. 



Note 3. When and can be substituted for as well as, these three 
words are taken as one clade. 

When hut is found in a mono which follows not only, these two 
words are taken as one clade. 

A list of the eludes which come under rule 7. 



And 

And therefore 

And yet 

And though 

And 

Although 

And so 

As 

As also 

As well as 

Also 

Again 

Because 

Beside 

Besides 

Being 

But 

But though 

But although 

But however 

Both (and) 

Either (or) 

Except 

Excepting 

Even 

Even so 

Else 

For (because) 

Further 



(and) 



Hence (therefore) 

However (but) 

Howsoever 

Howbeit 

If 

Inasmuch 

Lest 

Lest that 

Likewise 

Moreover 

Nay 

Nathless 

Not only (but) 

Nevertheless 

Notwithstanding 

No 

Now 

Neither (nor) 

Or 

Or even 

Otherwise (or) 

Provided ((f) 

Provided that 

Save 

Since (as) 

Than 

Then [therefore) 

Thence (therefore) 

Therefore 



Though 

Unless 

Wherefore 



SENTEOLOGY. 41 



Whereas 
Whether 
Yet {nevertheless) 



EXERCISES. 

A certain man planted a vineyard; 

and he set a hedge; 

and he digged a place; 

and he built a tower; 

and he let it out; 

and he went 

into a far country. 

And he went out thence; 

and , came 

into his own country; 

and his disciples followed him. 

Now, select all the clades which fall under Rule 7, from 
the exercises under page 43. 



PART II. 

SENTEOLOGY. 

Senteology is that part of syncratology, which respects 
the gnomodic, and the want of the gnomodic power of the 
words in a gnomod, or sentence. 

CHAPTER I. 
DIVISION OF THE CLADES. 
Clades are divided under senteology, into 

1. Gnomaclades, or verbs, and 

2. Ji gnomaclades, or nonverbs. 

1. The gnomaclade, or verb is a clade which is capable 
d2 



42 DIVISION OF THE CORMES. 

of being formed into a gnomod, or sentence; as, writes, 
am, &c. As, John writes letters, I am well. 

2. The agnomaclade, or nonverb is a clade which is not 
capable of being formed into a gnomod, or sentence, as, 
of, the, a, good, high, here, and, &c. 

REMARK. 

M John of" is not a gnomod. Nor is, " / the." Hence it b 
seen that while writes, and am are gnomable, sentencable, of, the, 
a, good, high, here, and and are agaomable, not gnomable, not sen- 
tencable. 



CHAPTER II. 

DIVISION OF THE CORMES, OR NOUNS. 
Cormes, or nouns are divided under senteology, into 

1. Poecormes, or Nominative nouns, and 

2. Nepoecormes, or objective nouns. 

1. The poecorme, or nominative noun, is a corme which 
f >rms a gnomaclade, or verb into a gnomod, or sentence; 
as, John writes letters. (John.) 

2. The nepoecorme, or objective noun is a corme which 
does not form a gnomaclade, or verb into a gnomod, or 
sentence; as, John writes letters, (letters.) 

Remark. —The poecorme. as poe imports, is the sentence-making, 
the sentence-forming corme. 

RULES. 

I. Any clade which becomes a gnomod on being con- 
jected to the poecorme, /, thon, he, or we, is a gnomaclade, 
or verb; as, 

I am, .im I? 

Be thou, Afi thou? 

He w, Is he? 

We are, Are we? 



DIVISION OF THE CORMES. 43 



? 



I 

Thou , 
He 

We , 



II. Any clade which does not become a gnomod, or sen- 
tence on being conjected to the poecorme, 7, thou, he, or 
we, is an agnomaclade, or nonverb; as, I the, thou a, he 
cold, we sick. 

SPECIMEN. 

1. Flies, a gnomaclade, or verb. Rule 1. Any clade 
which, on being conjected to the nominative, or poecorme, he, 
becomes a sentence, is a gnomaclade, or verb; as, He flies. 

2. Crooked, an agnomaclade. Rule 2. Any clade 
which does not become a gnomod on being conjected to 
the nominative, or poecorme, I, thou, he, or we, is an agno- 
maclade; as, crooked. 

EXERCISES IN SENTEOLOGY. 

Correctly, softly, prudently, well, accordingly, badly, 
and, though, hew, and, dealt, and, although, hang, nearer, 
verily, surely, indeed, positively, no, not, any, never, not, 
clad, knit, mowed, farther, many, clothed, near, hew, knit, 
why, rather, sooner, chiefly, especially, so, as, equally, 
thus, like, otherwise, else, differently, unlike, most, nearly, 
partially, partly, scarcely, hardly, sparingly, scantily, 
less, much, bountifully, liberally, catch, best, deal, clothe, 
worst, dig, clothe, least, dwell, crow, most, dwell, crow, 
least, or, last, engrave, dare, nearest, or, next, gild, dare, 
farthest, gild, deal, foremost, or, first, gird, better, dig, gird, 
worse, perfect, evil, or, ill, catched, best, less, crave, little, 
much, therefore, and, yet, hewed, former, bad, good, knit, 
as, ill, side-wise, how, certainly, truly, undoubtedly, yes, 
loaded, and, so, later, caught, dared, as, as, well, rived, far, 
participate, for, although, crew, learned, hang, late, at, all, 
crowd, namely, universally, together, generally, conjunc- 
tively, off, separately, apart, asunder, singly, alone, apiece, 
made, girded, provided, therefore, labored, again, though, 



44 SYNCLADEOLOGY. 

for, yet, hereafter, already, hitherto, lastly, afterwards, 
girt, digged, provided, that, gilded, but, though, dug, that, 
as, well, as, engraved, but, although, but, then, either, since, 
being, also, or, whereas, save, that, both, than, wherefore, 
besides, dwelled, as, but however, unless, beside, at, never- 
theless, less, shaped, around, notwithstanding, dwelt, past, 
into, shaped, of, after, but, moreover, least, sawed, because, 
amongst, howbeit, sheared, across, not, only, sawed, nay, 
likewise, inasmuch, nathless, hew, if, among, that, shaved, 
soon, primarily, previously, at, once, by, and, by, whereby, 
hanged, in, excepting, be, is, toward, shave, against, for, 
touching, behind, during, neither, without, except, graved, 
but, under, new, within, hung, throughout, respecting, by, 
no, betwixt, regarding, with, towards, from, beneath, save, 
atween, did, between, unto, an, underneath, atwixt; put, 
long, athwart, was, not, never, in, but, are, or, art, or, of, 
over, were, wot. burst, cut, may, might, could, would, should, 
laugh, run, walk, will, shall. 



PART III. 

SYNCLADEOLOGY. 

Syncladeology is that part of syncratology, which re- 
spects that classification of the clades, which is founded 
upon their frame-work connection with other words. 

CHAPTER I. 
DIVISION OF THE GNOMACLADES, OR VERBS. 
The gnomaclades, or verbs are divided under synclade- 
ology, into 

1. Poecorme, or intransitive, 

2. Nepoecorme, and 

3. Dicormic, or transitive. 

1. The poecorme gnomaclade, or intransitive verb is 
one which stands conjected to the poecorme, or nominative 
only; as, I can write letters, He ivalks, They laugh, Thou 
art ill, He is to return to-day. 



DIVISION OF THE AGNOMACLADES. 45 

2. The nepoecorme gnomaclade, or verb is one which 
stands conjected to the nepoecorme, or objective noun only; 
as, I saw him walk, He saw me move the book. {Move 
belongs to me, and book.) 

3. The dicormic gnomaclade, or transitive verb is one 
which stands conjected to both cormes, both nouns; as, I 
can write letters, He went to get the book. 



CHAPTER II. 

DIVISION OF THE AGNOMACLADES, OR NON VERBS. 

The agnomaclades, or nonverbs are divided under syn- 
cladeology, into 

1. Sterodades, or Prepositions, 

2. Metaclades, or Adjectives, 

3. Monoclades, or Conjunctions, and 

4. Clonoclades, or Adverbs. 

i. steroclade, or prefosition. 
A steroclade, or preposition is an agnomaclade which 
is confined to the nepoecorme, or objective noun; as, to 
them, with us, of him. (Not to they, with ive, of he.) 
(Steros, fixed, established.) 

H. METACLADE, OR ADJECTIVE. 

A metaclade, or Adjective is an agnomaclade which is 
not confined to the poecorme, nor to the nepoecorme, but 
may be moved from one to the other; as, A man saw this 
young child, This young child saw a man. 

Note. — In the first example, a is conjected to the poecorme, man, 
and this, and young to the nepoecorme, child. But in the second, a 
is moved from the poecorme to the nepoecorme. And this, and young 
are moved from the nepoecorme to the poecorme. (Meta, from one to 
another.) 

III. MONOCLADE, OR CONJUNCTION. 

A monoclade, or conjunction is an agnomaolnde which 
stands conjected to a mono; as, He returned; but (his bro- 
ther remained.) 



46 PROVING RULES. 

Note. — But is here corrected, not to any one word, but to the entire 
mono, "his brother remained." 

IV. CLONOCLADE, OR ADVERB. 

A clonoclade, or adverb is an agnomaclade which stands 
conjected to another clade; as, He writes fa%U She reads 
well, Very deep water. [Clono, a branch: hence, a clo- 
noclade is a clade of a clade.) 

QUESTIONS. 

1. What is a corme, or noun? 

2. How are cormes, or nouns divided under senteology? 

3. What is a poecorme, or nominative noun.' 

4. What is a nepoecorme, or objective noun.' 

5. How are clades divided under senteology.' 

6. What is a gnomaclade, or verb? 

7. What is an agnomaclade, or a nonverb? 

8. How are the gnomaclades, or verbs subdivided? 

9. What is a poecorme gnomaclade, or intransitive verb? 

10. What is a nepoecorme gnomaclade, or nepoecorme 
verb? 

11. What is a dicormic gnomaclade, or transitive verb.' 

12. How are the agnomaclades, or nonverbs subdivided? 

13. What is a steroclade, or preposition? 

14. What is a metaclade, or adjective .' 

15. What is a monoclade, or conjunction? 

16. What is a clonoclade, or adverb.' 

PROVING RULES. 

RULE I. 

That word which will answer the question that is formed 
by placing the first gnomaclade, or verb alter who, or ivhat, 
is a poecorme, or nominative noun; as, Moses smote the 
rock. Who smote? Moses. 

Caution 1. Be careful to use but lico words in forming 
the question. 

Caution 2. Be particularly careful to understand tin- 
proposition, that you may be able to pul .such a question 
as that particular corme which you desire to prove, will 
answer. 



PROVING RULES. 47 



That word which will answer the question that is formed 
by placing the poecorme, or nominative noun before all the 
gnomaclades, or verbs in the mono, and whom, or what 
after them, is a nepoccorme, or an objective noun; as, Moses 
smote the rock. Moses smote what? Rock. 

Caution 1. Be careful to prove, at least in your mind, 
the poecorme by Rule 1, before you attempt to prove your 
nepoecorme by Rule 2. 

Caution 2. Be particular to ascertain how many cormes 
there are in your mono; for, if your mono is a gnome- 
corme, or a gnomeclad, and you have but one corme, it fol- 
lows that this one is a poecorme. But if your mono is a 
gnomecorme, or a gnomeclad, and has two cormes, it follows 
that one is a poecorme, and the other a nepoecorme. 

Caution 3. Be particular to put such a question, as 
that corme which you desire to prove will answer. For 
instance — you wish to prove apples in the following con- 
struction: Apples John picked. Who picked? apples! 

This is nonsense, for this answer makes the apples pick. 

Who picked? John. 

This answer is not nonsense; but, as you do not wish 
to prove the word, John, you have not put the proper ques- 
tion. Put such a question as that corme will answer, 
which you wish to prove: hence, as you wish to prove the 
word, apples, you should put the following question which 
is dictated by the sense of the mono, and constructed ac- 
cording to Rule 2. John picked what? apples. 

RULE III. 

Every corme, or noun in an agnomeclad, is a nepoecor- 
me, or an objective noun; as, of him. 

QUESTIONS. 

1. How is the question which proves the corme to be a 
poecorme, formed? 

2. How is the question to be constructed, to prove that a 
corme is a nepoecorme? 

3. Is the corme in an agnomeclad always a nepoecorme? 

SPECIMEN OF PROVING BY THE ABOVE RULES. 

44 Charles saw hats." 



48 PROVING RULES. 

Proved thus: Who saw? Charles. A poecorme, or no- 
minative noun. Rule 1. Charles saw what? hats. A 
nepoecorme, or an objective noun. Rule 2. 



A clade which can be tensified is a gnomaclade, or verb; 
as, be, was, been, write, wrote, written, cuts, cut. 

Note. — Tensification is the process of putting a gnomaclade, 
or verb through all its timedexes; as, 

1. Phemic, write, 

2. Presynphcmic, hate written, 

3. Prediphemic, wrote, 

4. Presyndiphcmic, had written, 

5. Postphemic, will, or shall write, 

6. Prcpostphemic, will, or shall have written. 

It is not expected that the learner will enter into the process of 
regularly putting a gnomaclade through all its timedexes here. If 
the new form which he may give a clade, respects time, he may 
pronounce the word a gnomaclade, or verb. 

Caution 1. Be particular to ascertain whether a new 
form gives a different time. In the spirit of this Rule, a 
mere form variation is nothing: tensification requires a 
different time to every different form; as, reads, read, 
write, wrote. 

Caution 2. Bear in mind that almost every gnoma- 
clade has five phemic forms, and that a variation from one 
of these phemic forms to another of them, is not a varia- 
tion in time; as, write, writes, writeth, writ est, writing. 
Hence, the teacher must require the pupil to give such a 
new form to the clade as will indicate a different time; as, 
write, wrote. 

The timedexes are produced by the aid of the following 
letters: A, D, E, N, O, T, U. These are called the 
timedex letters. 

Say thus: Sing, sang, sung, a gnomaclade, or verb. 
Rule 4. 

The teacher should impress upon the mind of his pupil 
the importance of commencing the variation of the gnoma- 
clade, at the phemic timedex: should he find the word printed 
in any other timedex form, he should begin his variations 
at the phemic; as, in wrote — he wrote to me: write, wrote, 
written. 



PROVING RULES. 



49 



A KEY TO THE FOLLOWING PREPARED EXERCISES. 



Show — show, shew, shown. 
Love — love, loved. 
Has — has, had. 
Hast — hast, hadst. 
Have — have, had. 
Work — work, worked. 
Will — will, would. 
Shall — shall, should. 
Can — cart, could. 
Get — get, got. 
Be — be, was, been. 
Am — am, was, been. 
Art-r-art, wast, been. 
Is — is, was, been. 
Are — are, were, been. 
Been — be, was, been. 
Was — is, was, been, 
Were — are, were, been. 
Do — do, did, done. 
Done — do, did, done. 
Dare — dare, dared. 



1. 

2. 


Sing-^sing, sang, sung. 
Is — is, was, been. 


22. 
23. 


3. 


Art — art, wast, been. 


24, 


4. 
5. 


Ring — ring, rang, rung. 
Know — know, knew, known. 


25. 
26. 


6. 


Go — go, went, gone. 


27. 


7. 


Drawn — draw, drew, drawn. 


28. 


8. 
9. 


Fly — -fly, flew, flown. 
Drink — drink, drank, drunk. 


29. 
30. 


10. 
11. 


Begin — begin, began, begun. 
Leave — leave, left. 


31. 
32. 


12. 
13. 


May — may, might. 
Deal — deal, dealt. 


33. 
34. 


14. 


Dwell — dwell, dwelt. 


35. 


15. 

16. 
17. 


Spill — spill, spilt. 
Feel— feel, felt. 
Send — send, sent. 


36. 

37. 

38. 


18. 


Be — be, was, been. 


39. 


19. 


Am — am, was, been. 


40. 


20. 


Art — art, wast, been. 


41. 


21. 


Strew — strew, strewed. 


42. 



Note. The words which are placed before the timedex letters, are 
timedexed by the use of these letters. And the letter put first, is used 
in the first variation. The number of periods shows the number of 
variations which the same word may have. 



METHOD. 

Give — give, gave, given, — a gnomaclade. (verb.) 

PREPARED EXERCISES. 



1. Sing 


A 


U 


13. Deal 


. 


2. Is 




N 


14. Dwell 




3. Art 






15. Spill 

16. Feel 




4. Ring 

5. Know 




U 




E 


N 


17. Send 


. . 


6. Go 






18. Be 


A N 


7. Draw 






19. Am 




8. Fly 






20. Art 




9. Drink 


A 


U 


21. Strew 


! D 


10. Begin 






22. Show 


E N 


11. Leave 


T 




23. Love 


D 


12. May 
E 






24. Has 













50 PROVING RULES, 



25. Hast 

26. Have 

27. Work 

28. Will 

29. Shall 

30. Can 

31. Get 

32. Be 

33. Am 



. 34. Art 

. 35. Is 

. 36. Are . E 

. 37. Been* . A 

. 38. Was 

. 39. Were . E 

O 40. Do . I 

A N 41. Done 

. 42. Dare . 1) 



* Begin the variation of the word at the phemic timedcx in .ill 
cases; as, is, was, been, (not been, was, is.) 



That agnomaclade which can be corrected to them, is a 
steroclade; as, He went unto the Mount of Olives. Unto 
them, of them, (preposition.) 

Caution. Be particular to ascertain whether your mono 
is an agnomeclad. 



The agnomaclade (except that which can be conjected to 
them) which can be conjected to thing, things, man, or 
Adams, is a metaclade; as, the thing, those things, an 
Adams, Mr. Adams, John Adams, (adjective.) 

Caution. Be particular to see whether the clade does 
not fall under Rule 5 — for all steroclades may be conjected 
to things; as, of things, among things. 



That agnomaclade which can be conjected to the mono. 
They are there, or to any other mono, is a monoclade; as, 
John is here; but they are there, (conjunction.) 

RULE VIII. 

That agnomaclade which can be conjected to high, heavy, 
strong, black, man's, or men's, — teas, fly, look, live, or 
spoken, is a clonoclade; as, much higher, too heavy, quite 
strong, ebony black, there was, fly high, look here, spoken 
of. (adverb.) 



PROVING RULES. 51 

Caution. Do not attempt to refer a cor me to any of 
the words mentioned in this Rule. You are cautioned 
against this, because even teachers, from too slight atten- 
tion to the Rule, not unfrequently attempt to prove the 
cormes, /, they, it, by saying, / live, they fly, <fcc. 

Such do not apprehend the Rule aright. Their practice 
indicates that the Rule is mere sound. The Rule, how- 
ever, is replete with precision, and direction. For it says, 
almost expressly, that the word which is to be proved, is 
the inferior clade; and it clearly affirms that the word to be 
proved, must be conjected iofly, live, &c. But /is so far 
from being conjected to live, that live is conjected to /. 

A FULL SPECIMEN OF PROVING BY THE PRECEDING RULES. 

[" The power (of speech) is a faculty] ( , , peculiar) 
(to man;) (and , was bestowed) (on him) (by his 
beneficent Creator) (for the greatest , ) (and , , , ) 
( , , most excellent uses;) (but (alas) how often do 
we pervert it) (to the worst , ) (of purposes.") 

The power is a faculty. 
Proved thus: The thing, a metaclade. Rule 6. 
power — What is? power, a poecorme. Rule 1. 
is — is, was, been, a gnomaclade. Rule 4. 
a — a thing, a metaclade. Rule 6. 
faculty— Power is what? faculty, a nepoecorme. Rule 2. 

" of speech" 
of — of them, a steroclade. Rule 5. 
speech — in an agnomeclad, a nepoecorme. Rule 3. 

" which is peculiar." 
which — What is? which, a poecorme. Rule 1. 
is — is, was, been, a gnomaclade. Rule 4. 
Peculiar — peculiar thing, a metaclade. Rule 6. 

" to man." 
to — to them, a steroclade. Rule 5. 
man, in an agnomeclad, a nepoecorme. Rule 3. 

"and it was bestowed." 
and — and " they are there," a monoclade. Rule 7. 
it — What was? it, a poecorme. Rule 1. 
was — is, was, been, a gnomaclade. Rule 4. 



52 PROVING RULES. 

bestowed — bestow, bestowed, a gnomaclade. Rule 4. 

" on him." 
on — on them, a steroclade. Rule 5. 
him — him, in an agnomeclad, a nepoecorme. Rule 3 

" by his beneficent Creator." 
by — by them, a steroclade. Rule 5. 
his — his things, a metaclade. Rule 6. 
beneficent — beneficent things, a metaclade. Rule 6. 
Creator — in an agnomeclad, a nepoecorme. Rule 3. 

"for the greatest uses." 
for— for them, a steroclade. Rule 5. 
the — the things, a metaclade. Rule 6. 
greatest — greatest thing, a metaclade. Rule 6. 
uses — in an agnomeclad, a nepoecorme. Rule 3. 

" and it was bestowed." 
and — and " they are there," a monoelade. Rule 7. 
it — What was? it, a poecorme. Rule 1. 
was — 19, was, been, a gnomaclade. Rule 4. 
bestowed — bestow, bestowed, a gnomaclade. Rule 4. 

"for the most excellent uses" 
for — -for them, a steroclade. Rule 5. 
the — the things, a metaclade. Rule 6. 
most — most high, a clonoclade. Rule 8. 
excellent — excellent things, a metaclade. Rule 6. 
uses — in an agnomeclad, a nepoecorme. Rule 3. 

"but how often do we pervert it?" 
but — but "they are there," a monoelade. Rule 7. 
how — how high, a clonoclade. Rule 8. 
often — often fly, a clonoclade. Rule 8. 
do — do, did, done, a gnomaclade. Rule 4. 
we — Who do? we, a poecorme. Rule 1. 
pervert — pervert, perverted, a gnomaclade. Rule 4. 
it — We pervert what? it, a nepoecorme. Rule 2. 
"alas" — "alas," in an agnomeclad, hence a nepoecorme. 
Rule 3. 

" to the worst purpose." 
to — to them, a steroclade. Rule 5. 
the — the thing, a metaclade. Rule 6. 
worst — worst things, a metaclade. Rule 6, 



PROVING RULES. 53 

purpose — in an agnomeclad, hence a nepoecorme. Rule 3. 
" of purposes." 

of — o/'them, a steroclade. Rule 5. 

purposes — in an agnomeclad, hence a nepoecorme. Rule 3. 

PROVING RULES REPEATED. 

Cormes, or nouns. 

1. That corme which will answer the question that is 
formed by placing theirs/ gnomaclade after who, or what, 
is the poecorme. (nominative noun.) 

2. That corme which will answer the question that is 
constructed by placing the poecorme before all the gnoma- 
clades in the mono, and whom, or what after them, is a 
nepoecorme. (objective noun.) 

3. The corme in an agnomeclad, is a nepoecorme. (ob- 
jective noun.) 

4. A clade which can be timedexed, is a gnomaclade. 
(verb.) 

5. The agnomaclade which can be conjected to them, is 
a steroclade. (preposition.) 

6. The agnomaclade which can be conjected to thing, 
things, man, or Adams, is a metaclade. (adjective.) 

7. That agnomaclade which can be conjected to " they are 
there," to any other mono, is a monoclade. (conjunction.) 

8. That agnomaclade which can be conjected to high, 
heavy, strong, black, man's, or men's — or to was, fly, 
look, live, or spoken, is a clonoclade. (adverb.) 

exercises, 

To be proved exactly according to the preceding specimen. 
ivith an application of the Rules. 

1. [That man is old;] (but he is not wise.) 

2. [The birds have flown] (over those very high trees.) 

3. [Paul, (and Silas , , ) sang praises] to God.) 

1. John Picked apples. 

2. Apples John picked. 

3. Charles saw hats. 

4. Hats Charles saw. 

5. Men build houses. 

6. Julia reads books. 



54 PROVING RULES. 

7. Peter makes shoes. 

8. Nancy makes coats. 

[John picked apples] (which I saw.) 

[John picked apples.'] 

Proved thus: Who picked? John, a poecorme. Rule 1. 
John picked what? apples, a nepoecorme. Rule 2. 

(" which I saw.") 

Proved thus: I saw what? which, a nepoecorme. Rule 2. 
Who saw? I, a poecorme. Rule 1. 

1. [John saw the boy] (that hurt me.) 

2. [James found papers] (which I lost.) 

3. [They have such silk] (as pleases me.) 

What pleaaes? as. 

4. [Johnson has such silk] (as I like.) 

I like what? as. 

5. [The fruit (which falls off) is ripe.] 

6. [The fruit (which John gathered) is ripe.] 

Charles saw John's hat. 
Proved thus: John's things, a metaclade. Rule 6. 

1. Apple trees produce apples. 

2. New books may be enlertaiuing. 

3. He is entertaining his company. 

4. Whose book is that book? 

5. Which man did he call? 

6. The phemic timedex marks phemic time. 

7. [A boy brought the note] (which I read.) 

8. Those young ladies wrote these beautiful lines. 

9. [Get , thy book,] (John.) 

10. 1 want American, black silk hats. 

11. That house has the best iron, hollow ware. 

For additional exercises, take page 18, 20, 23, 25, 27. 
31, 35, and any others which seem well adapted to the pro- 
cess of proving. 



DIVISION OF CORMES UNDER SEMENOLOGT. 55 

PART IV. 

SEMENOLOGY. 

Semenology is that part of syntax, which respects the 
power of a word to designate, or distinguish those things to 
which the Dictionary meaning of the word does not apply. 
{Gender, number, time, fyc.) 

CHAPTER I. 
DIVISION OF CORMES UNDER SEMENOLOGY. 

Cormes are divided under semenology into Generic, Indi- 
vidual, and Proxy. 

1. A generic corme is one which includes a whole genus, 
class, race, or family; as, man, woman, boy, girl, vice, 
virtue, strength, news, remainder, addition, indignation, 
confirmation, (common noun.) 

He is the Washington of America, The Smiths were 

present. 

Note 1. Here the word, Washington, is used in the sense of the 
word, General, and is therefore generic. He is the Washington of 
tiie age. That is, he is the distinguished General of this age, as 
Washington was of his. 

Note 2. The word, Smiths, is used in the sense of the word family. 
The Smiths were present. That is, the family of Smiths. The word, 
Smiths, is generic because it is here made to denote the entire family. 

Note 3. It may be well to say in addition to wliat has already 
been remarked, that in ascertaining whether a corme is generic, or 
individual, the corme must be taken alone. 

If the corme should be considered with other words, any generic 
corme may be converted into an individual one ; as, My glove, this 
hat, men's hats, hot iron. 

But the question is, not whether the word, glove, is brought down 
to an individual glove; but whether this corme when printed alone, 
does not mean all gloves. 

1. My Glove. 

2. Glove. 



56 DIVISION OF CORMES UNDER SEMENOLOGY. 

To say that glove is an individual corme in the second instance 
merely because my applies it to an individual glove, would be to dis- 
regard the native powers of this corme — it would be to tell, not what 
this corme is in itself, but what it is through the restraining agency 
of another word. The question for the pupil is, has this corme power 
within itself to apply itself to an individual? If so, it is not a generic, 
but an individual corme. 

2. An individual corme is one which has the power to 
apply itself to an individual of a class; as, Paid, Sarah. 
Washington, Smith, To see the sun is pleasant, The read- 
ing of these pages will aid your judgment, (prop, noun.) 

Note. Seeing, and reading are individual acts — hence their names 
are individual cormes. 

3. A proxy corme is one which has been introduced 
into a phrenod to act for some corme, clade, or mono, 
which may be called its principal; as, He, it, which, as, 
that: (pronoun.) 

1. [Now "we know that] {thou hast a devil.") 

Note. " We" is a proxy corme for Jeics; " that" is a proxy corme 
for the entire mono which follows it; and thou is a proxy corme for 
" Christ:'' 

2. [That (man is mortal) has never been denied."] 

Note. — Here, "that is a proxy corme for the mono which follows 
it — " man is mortal" What has never been denied? That has never 
been denied. 

3. " He was not that light; but was sent to bear witness 
of that light, that'll] men through him might believe." 

Note. Here, the last that is a proxy corme for the two monos, (all 
men might believe) (through him.) 

He was sent to bear witness of that light. He was sent 
for what? for that. That is, for that which is stated in the 
two monos which follow: M all j?un, through him, might 
believe." 

4. " It is Divine to forgive our enemies." 

Note. Here, it is a proxy corme for the semimono, " to forgive our 
tnemies. (Half mono.) 



DIVISION OF CORMES UNDER SEMENOLOGY. 



57 



5. And it was revealed unto him that he should not see 
death before he had seen the Lord's Christ. 

Note. Here, it, as well as that, is a proxy corme for the rnonos, 
(he should not see death before) (he had seen the Lord's Christ.) 

6. What was revealed? it was. What was revealed? 
that was. 

7. He told me to read the letter to him, and I did so. 

Note. Here, so is a proxy corme for the semimono, "fo read the 
letter.' 1 '' 





PROXY CORMES. 


I, we, 


it, you, 


Thou, ye, 


one, ones, 


He, she, they, 


others, 


Who, whoever, 


which, as, 


Whosoever. 


that, this, 


Me, us, 


these, those 


Thee, 


so. 


Him, ., 
tt them, 
.Her, 




Whom, 




Whomsoever, 




Myself, ourselves, 




Thyself, yourselves, 




He'Jsdf' ^emselves, 




Oneself, itself, 




One-another, 




Each-other. 





SUBDIVISIONS OF THE PROXY CORMES. 

The proxy cormes are divided under semenology, into 
exhibitive, and unexhibitive. 

1. The exhibitive proxy cormes are those which show 
in their form, that they may be poecormes, or that they are 
always nepoecormes; as, /, we, who, me, its, whom. 



I 
Thou 



EXHIBITIVE PROXY CORMES. 



ye 



58 DIVISION OF CORMES UNDER SEMENOLOGY. 



He, she 
Who 


they 
who 


him 

her 

whom 

whomsoever 

myself 

thyself 

himself 

herself 

oneself 

itself 

one-another 

each-other 



them 
whom 

ourselves 
yourselves 

themselves 



2. The imexhibitive proxy cormes are those that have 
nothing in themselves, which exhibits whether they are 
poecormes, or nepoecormes; as, it, which'. 

UNEXHIBITIVE PROXY CORMES. 

It, you, one, ones, others, which, as, that, those, this, 
these, so. 

SUBDIVISION OF THE EXHIBITIVE PROXY CORMES. 

The exhibitivc proxy cormes are divided under seme- 
nology, into poe-ic, and nepoe-ic, and dicormic. 

1. The poe-ic exhibitive proxy corme is one which ex- 
hibits in its form that it may be a poecorme; as /, we. 

POE-TC EXHIBITIVE PROXY CORMES. 

I we 

Thou ye 

He, she they 
Who 

Whoever 

Whosoever 

2. The nepoe-ic exhibitive proxy corme is one which ex- 
hibits in its form that it is always a nepoecorme; as, me, us. 

NEPOE-IC EXHIBITIVE PROXY CORMES. 

Me us 

Thee 

Him .. 
Her them 
Whom whom 

Whomsoever ~ 

Myself ourselves 



INDICATION OF CORMES. 59 

Thyself yourselves 
Himself ., , 

Herself lheraselves 

Oneself 

Itself 

One another each other. 

QUESTIONS. 

1. Can you repeat all the poe-ic exhibitive proxy cormes? 

2. Can you repeat all the nepoe-ic exhibitive proxy 
cormes? 

3. What does a poe-ic proxy corme exhibit? 

4. What does a nepoe-ic proxy corme exhibit? 

5. What is the import of poe-ic as used in this work? 
It conveys some allusion to the poecorme. For instance: 
the proxy corme, he, has a poe-ic form. That is, he has 
a form which indicates that this corme may be a poecorme. 
The proxy corme, him, has a nepoe-ic form. That is, this 
word's very form shows that the word itself must ever be a 
wepoecorme. 



CHAPTER II. 

INDICATION OF CORMES. (person.) 

The indication of a corme is that designation which it 
makes of (he former of the sentence, of the auditor of the 
sentence, and of him that is neither the former, nor auditor: 
as, " / have brought unto thee my son." 

The indications are three; viz. formative, auditive, and 
sinefunctional. 

1. The corme that indicates which person is constituted 
the former of the sentence, is of the formative indication: 
as, " Master, /have brought unto thee my son." (/.) (1st 

PERSON.) 

2. The corme that indicates which person is constituted 
the auditor of the sentence, is of the auditive indication: 
as, Master, I have brought my son. (Master.) (2d person.) 

3. The corme which indicates that the person, or thing 



60 



NUMERATION OF CORMES. 



which it denotes, bears no functional relation to the sen- 
tence, is of the sinefunctional indication; as, Master, I 
have brought my son. (Son.) (3d person.) 



CHAPTER III. 



NUMERATION OF CORMES. (number.) 

2. The numeration of a corme respects its means, and 
act of numerating things upon the general principle of unity, 
and plurality. 

There are two numerations; Singular, and Plural. 

The sbgular is that restraining capacity of a corme, 
which makes it apply to but one thing, or one collection; as. 
pen, it, book, jury, court, school, family. 

The plural numeration is that multiplying capacity of a 
corme, which makes the word apply to more than one; as, 
pens, they, books, juries, courts, schools, families. 

That the pupi! may become well acquainted with the different ways 
in which the plural numeration of cormes is formed, some scheme, 
calculated to require him to say in what manner every corme which 
he passimates, forms its plural, seems almost indispensable. Hence 
the cormes are referred to different classes according to the means 
used in forming their respective plurals. The classes are denominated 
Pluratories. There are fourteen Pluratories; namely, 



1. The S "| 

2. The Es 

3. The Ves 

4. The les 

5. The E 

6. The En 

7. The Ee 



8. The Ic, Ice "| 

9. The 1m 

10. The Ae 
pturatory. 1 1. The / 

12. The A 

13. The Xcpos 

11. The Sense 



pluraiory. 



1. The S Pluraiory. 

1. The s pluratory includes those cormes to which s can 
be affixed without the possibility of losing its numeral, its 



NUMERATION OF CORMES. 61 

cormic affix character; as, book, books, pen, pens, chair, 
chairs, vice, vices. 

Note. It may be well to remark here that s as an affix to cormes 
is numeral in its import, and denotes plurality. S has this numeral 
import in all instances where it holds in the frame-work of the word, 
a mere affix relation; as, book, book-s, pen, pen-s. In the same way 
in which semi, and demi are prefixed to cormes to denote half; as, 
semi-vowel, demi-tonc; s is affixed to cormes to denote plurality; as, 
book, book-s. But as semi, and demi lose their prefix import with the 
loss of their prefix relation, as in seminary, demise, so does s lose its 
numeral import with the loss of its affix relation; as, in atlas, John 
Maas, as. 

1. Semi-vowe], Seminary. 

2. Book, Book-s, At-las. 

Here, as semi modifies the word, vowel, so does s modify the word 
hook. Semi makes the word, vowel, mean a half vowel — and s makes 
the word, book, mean many books. And, as semi loses its prefix cha- 
racter in seminary, by becoming - an essential part of the word, so s 
loses its-affix character in atlas, by becoming an essential part of the 
monogram to which it belongs — las. 

Hence where it is possible for s to convert the syllable into a sylla- 
ble different from that intended, by appearing to be an essential part 
of it, s should not be used as a pluralizing affix; as, lady, \a-dys, wo, 
wos, potato, po-ta-ios. 

Here s is liable to be taken, not as a mere pluralizing affix to the 
word, lady, but as an essential part to the last syllable — and as such 
converts dy into dys, dis. Hence the word would become la-dys, or 
la-dis, instead of ladies. And, if we give s its sharp hissing sound, it 
converts wo into was. Hence instead of having ivoes, we have teas. 
And if we give a its short broad sound, and s its sharp hissing 
sound, we have in po-ta -tos, po-ta-tas, instead of potatoes. 

In instances, however, where y is preceded by a vowel, s retains its 
affix character ; as, attor-ney, atlor-neys. Neys, as a mere syllable 
is nearly equal to nies. 

S retains its affix character where it merely adds its own sound to 
that of the syllable to which it is affixed; as, money, moneys, chimney, 
chimneys. But where s not only adds its own sound to that of the 
syllable to which it is affixed, but actually changes the syllable into 
one entirely ditferent in sound and import, s loses its numeral, its 
affix character; as, wo, wos, lady, \n-dys, directory, directo-rys. 

Note 2. It may be doubted whether the cormes which end their 
singular in e, belong to the 8 pluratory, or not; as, vice, vices, face 
facts, grace, graces. 

It is more than probable that these cormes belong to the es plura- 
tory. True, nothing but s is affixed to the singular, because the c 
with which the singular terminates, answers a double purpose, for 

F 



62 



NUMERATION OF CORMES. 



while it is made an essential part of the word itself, it is mnde a part 
of the pluralizing affix. This position, however, is taken rather as a 
speculation than as a fact. (Facc-es, race-es, lacc-cs.) 

I. 5 PLURATORY. 

1. The S Pluratory is the place, compartment, or class 
to which all those cormes are referred to which s can be 
affixed without the possibility of losing its numeral, its 
affix character; as, pen, booh, face, race. 



1 


2 


3 


4 


Automaton 


affray 


brief 


graff 


Beau 


allay 


dwarf 


viischiej 


Cherub 


attorney 


fif* 


proof 


Encomium 


chimney 


gnef 


reproof 


Medium 


delay 


gulp 


roof 


Memorandum 


money 


handkerchief 


scarf 


Seraph 


Sunday 


hoof 


stag- 


Mono 


Mussulman 




strife 
surf 
turf 
wharf 



Note 1. The word, beau, is French, and is generally pluralized br 
affixing A'; as, beau*. 

The word is so well known, however, in the English phrenod, that 
it may be rendered plural by the numeral s without any danger of 
taking it for another word — indeed I do not see that s is liable to los* 
its affix character in this place any more than in attorneys. 

The other cormes in the first column, are made from foreign phre- 
nods, and may be pluralized by s, and also by the numeral affixes pe- 
culiar to their respective sources. 

Each of these is denominated a Duplus. A Duplus is a word which 
has two plurals; as, mediums, media, (s, a.) 

A Uniplus is a word which has but one plural; as, pen, pens. 

Note 2. The words in the third column, as well as those in the 
fourth, are exceptions to other pluratories. 



II. Es PLURATORY. 

The es pluratory is composed of such cormes as will not 
receive s as a numeral affix without the e; as, box, church. 
(Box-es, ehurch-es, not, boxs, churchs.) or 

The es pluratory is composed of those cormes where e is 
required to enable s to retain its affix, its numeral chargrtcr: 
as, box, church. 



NUMERATION OF CORMES. bd 

These are those which terminate the singular in soft ch, 
in x, sh, and ss, and in o where o is preceded by a conso- 
nant. 

Apollo, grass, memento, 

Box, lass, miss, 

Church, lash, negro, 

Echo, manifesto, rebus, 

Calash, musketto, volcano. 

index, ellipsis, 

See exceptions to the es pluratory, under the s pluratory. The ex; 
ceptions are those instances in which o is preceded by a vowel 
as, folio, io, seraglio, nuncio, punctio. 

REMARKS. 

Individual cormes have the plural, when they refer to a race, or 
family; as, the Campbells, the Smiths. 

In such instances the individual cormes become generic ones. 

Individual cormes are plural ized where they refer to several persons 
of the same name; as, The eight Henrys, The two Mr. Smiths, The 
two Miss Browns, The Miss Boardmans. 

But in addressing letters in which all are equally concerned, it is 
customary to pluralize the tille, Mr. or Miss; as, Misses Brown, Misses 
Rand. (Not right.) 

The title is pluralized also where the names are different; as, Messrs, 
Adams, and Munroe. 

Note. Index may be considered a duplus — it has two plurals 
though not without regard to the sense. When the word signifies 
pointers, or tables of contents it is pluralized by es. 

But when it signifies algebraic quantities, it is pluralized by ices — 
indices. 

III. Ves PLURATORY. 

The ves pluratory is that compartment, or class to which 
those cormes belong that end the singular in f, and fe, and 
which by substituting v for/, can take the numeral affix, 
ves, without turning into other words; as, half, halves. 

Note. Those words which res would so change as to render them 
other words, or so deform as to render them no words, are of the s plu- 
ratory; as, fife, Jives, gulf, gulves. 

Wharf, with some ethers, is a Duplus. 

beef, knife, self, thief, 

calf; leaf, sheep, wharf, 

elf, life, shclt; wile, 

half, loaf, staff, wolf. 



64 NUMERATION OF CORMES. 

Those cormes which end the singular in /, and fe generally belong 
to the s pluratory. 

IV. Ies PLURATORY. 

The ies pluratory is that verbatory, or class to which 
those cormes belong, that substitute i for y, where the s 
alone would lose its affix character, and where the es with- 
out this substitute, would deform the word by adding ano- 
ther monogram, or syllable; as, lady, ladies, duty, duties. 

Note. Here if s alone, is affixed, lady becomes \a-dys; and duty 
becomes du-tys. And if es should be affixed, lady would become 
la-dy-es. And if the word should be considered an amphogram — fa 
word of two syllables) thus, la-dyes, du-tyes, the word, yes, would 
become a mere affix to other words. In this way we should have 
two derivative affixes importing precisely the same thing — yes, and 
ies. 

Besides, yes is not synonymous with ies in sound. Yes is yis, and 
ies is sometimes short ee with s; as, ies, ees. La-dees, dutees. Nor is 
it in the power of any letter to make yes, ies. Hence dyes is not 
equal to dies — nor is tyes synonymous with ties. Dies is dees; and 
ties is tees. But dyes is dy-es; and tyes is ty-es. 

Nor is it in the power of any letter except a hypergram, or vowel, 
to make ys equal to es, for es as an affix is short ee with s; as, ys, ees. 
Now eys as an affix is nearly, or quite ees — for the y is short which 
gives it the sound of short c — hence eys is nearly, or quite ees. 
Therefore all cormes terminating a singular with a y which is pre- 
ceded by a hypergram, belong to the s pluratory; as, day, days. But 
unless the y is preceded by a hypergram, the corme belongs to the 
ies pluratory, as fly, flies. 

beauty, fly, i, es. 

duty, penny, i, es. 

Penny is a Duplus — it may be pluralized in two ways — pennies, 
pence. 

V. E PLURATORY. 

The e pluratory is that compartment, or class to which 
those cormes belong that form their plural by substituting e 
for a; as man, men, alderman, aldermen. 

VI. En, or Ren PLURATORY. 

The en pluratory is that compartment, or class to which 
those cormes belong that form their plural by the numeral 
en, or ren; as, brother, brethren, child, children. 



NUMERATION OF CORMES. 65 

Note. Brother is a duplus — it may come under the s pluratory as 
well as under the ren. 

VII. Ee PLURATORY. 

The ee pluratory is that compartment, or class to which 
those cormes belong, that form their plural by substituting 
ee for oo; as, foot, feet, goose, geese, tooth, teeth. 

Note. Booby belongs to the ies pluratory. Moon with some other 
words, belongs to the s pluratory. 

VIII. Ice PLURATORY. 

The ice pluratory is the compartment, or class to which 
those cormes belong, that form their plural by substituting 
ice for buse; as, mouse, mice, louse, lice. 

IX. Im PLURATORY. 

The im pluratory is that compartment, or class to which 
those cormes belong, that have been derived from the 
Hebrew, and form their plural by the Hebrew numeral 
affix, im; as, cherub, cherubim, seraph, seraphim. 

Note. Cherub as well as seraph, is a Duplus. 

X. Ae PLURATORY. 

The x pluratory is that verbuary, or class to which those 
cormes belong that are of Latin extraction, and form their 
plural by the Latin numeral affix, ss; as, lamina, lamina?. 

XL / PLURATORY. 

The i pluratory is that verbuary, or class to which those 
cormes belong, which are made from the Latin, and the 
Greek, and which form their plural by the numeral affix, i; 
as, magus, magi, radius, radii, genius, genii. 

Note. When men of genius arc meant, genius falls into the es 
pluratory; as, the Smiths are all geniuses. 

But when aerial spirits are meant, tenuis is referred to the i plura- 
tory; as, " these are some good genii sent to protect us." 

tndced "genius" may be considered a Duplus. 
F 2 



66 NUMERATION OF CORMES. 

XII. A PLURATORY. 

The a pluratory is that verbuary, or class to which those 
cormes belong, that are of foreign derivation, and which are 
pluralized by the numeral affix, a: as, criterion, criteria, 
arcanum, arcana. 

arcanum medium ' i 

criterion * s stratum * s 

datum stamen * & 

erratum 

effluvium 

genus * es 

XIII. Neposi PLURATORY. 

The nepos pluratory is that class to which those corme^ 
belong, that are pluralized by a new word; as, I, we, he. 
they, thou, ye, you. 

I he 

me him 

thou she 

thee her, it. 

XVI. Sense PLURATORY. 

The sense pluratory is that class to which those cormes 
belong, that are pluralized by the sense only; as, sheep, 
deer, which. 

Note. This pluratory consists of the sin-e-sig-nums. 

REMARKS. 

1. There are very many cormes which we have no need to plural - 
ize — such as nothing, something, pride, Sec. These arc denominated 
Sin-e-plures. {Sine without, and plus, plural — meaning- without u 
plural.) 

2. There are others which are ever plural — such as lungs, politics, 
dec. These are denominated, Eacrplures. 

3. And there are a few which have no numeral sign, or form, al- 

* Criterion, genus, medium, stratum, as well as stamen is a Duplus. 
t This word is constructed from the Greek, Neos, new, and epos, a 
word, and means a new word — New word pluratory. 



67 



though they are used in both numerations — such as de?r, sioine, 
which, who. These are styled Sin-e-sig-nums. (Sine, without, sig a 
contraction of sign, and num a contraction of number. 



SIN-E-PLURES. 


EVERPLURES. 


SIN-E-SIG-NUN 


alms 


bellows 


deer 


bread 


compasses 


means 


meat* 


ethics 


sheep 


news 


measles 


swine 


tobacco 


mathematics* 


which 


tresses 


optics 


as 


treble 


pains 


that 


trice 


nippers 


who 


nothing 


pincers 


whom 


something 


politics 


whoever 


pride 


pneumatics 


whomsoever 


gold 


riches 


whosoever. 


rest 


scissors 




strength 


shears 




business 


tongs 




silver 


twezars, &c. 




sobriety 






evenness 






heat 






newness 






philosophy, &c. 







CHAPTER IV. 



GENDER. 

The gender of a corme respects its capacity to distin- 
guish one sex from the other, to include both sexes at the 
same time, or to conceal which sex is denoted. 

There are four Genders; viz. Masculine, Feminine, 
Ambi, and Mao. 

1. The Masculine is a capacity of the corme to distin- 
guish the male from the female; as, a man. 

2. The Feminine Is a capacity of the corme to designate 
the female; as, a ivoman. 

3. The Ambi is a capacity of the corme to include both 
sexes; as, his parents are dead. 



68 GENDER. 

4. The Muo gender respects the ability of the corme to 
conceal the sex of the animal of which mention is made: 
as, " a person passed my window in haste." 

Note. Sometimes the gender of the corme is determined from the 
context. 

Genepos, Ne-genepos, Femepos, Malepos, Ambi- genepos, 
Mu-genepos, Pe-ne-pos. 

1. Genepos is constructed from gender, and epos, and 
means a word which has gender; as, man, woman, person, 
animal, sun, moon. 

2. Negenepos is constructed from genepos, and the nega- 
tive, ne, and means a word which has no gender; as, book, 
table, pen. 

3. Malepos (pronounced male-epos) is constructed from 
male, and epos, and means a word which denotes a male; 
as, lad, taylor, drake. 

4. Femepos is constructed from feminine, and epos, and 
means a word which denotes a female; as, girl, tayloress, 
duck. 

5. Ambigenepos is constructed from Ambi, both, and 
genepos, and means a corme which has both genders; as, 
his parents. 

6. Mugenepos is constructed from the Greek, muo, to 
shut, hence to conceal, and genepos, and means a corme 
which shuts up, or conceals its gender; as, that child, that 
parent, this servant. 

7. Fenepos is constructed from pene, almost, and epos, 
and means a corme which has almost all the semenological 
properties; as, who. Who may have all the genders, both 
numerations, and all the indications. 

SPECIMEN. 

Book, Man, Woman, Servant, fyc. 



book, . 
man, . 
woman, 
servant, 
ladies, . 



a negenepos, of the s pluratory. 
a malepos, of the e pluratory. 
a femepos, of the e pluratory. 
a mugenepos, of the * pluratory. 
a femepos* of the ies pluratory. 



DIVISION OF THE AGNOMACLADES. 69 

alms .... a negenepos, and a sineplus. 

bellows, ... a negenepos, and an everplus. 

deer, .... an ambi-genepos, and a sinesignum of 

the sense pluratory. 

/, a genepos, of the nepos pluratory. 

we, a genepos, of the nepos pluratory. 

medium, ... a negenepos, and a duplus of the a, and 

the s pluratory. 
seraph, ... a genepos, and a duplus, of the s, and 

im pluratory. 

EXERCISES. 

Automaton, affray, brief, grafT, laugh, beau, Apollo, box, 
lash, lass, ellipsis, beef, calf, wolf .Mussulman, alley, attor- 
ney, lady, money, seraph, cherub, encomium, memoran- 
dum, medium, gulf, wharf, musketto, negro, miss, mani- 
festo, index, staff, wife, leaf, brother, man, alderman, child, 
foot, seraph, lamina, mouse, magus, radius, genius, truncus, 
corme, arcanum, criterion, datum, stratum, erratum, L me, 
thou, thee, it, her, deer, means, swine, which, who, whom, 
as, that, tongs, shears, silver, heat, none, business, pride, 
something, nothing, roof, proof, mischief, dwarf, handker- 
chief, himself, myself, herself, itself, them, they, who, we, 
whoever. 



CHAPTER V. 

DIVISION OF THE AGNOMACLADES INTO 

1. Olinepoi, and 

2. Ne-Clinepoi. 

1. A Clinepos* is an agnomaclade which can be modi- 
fied in sense, by being declined in its form; as, this, that, 
lady's, high, good, mine, thine, — [these, those, ladies', 
higher, highest; better, best, ours, yours. 

2. A Neclineposf is an agnomaclade which ran not be 

* Pronounced Clin-e-pos. t Pronounced Ne-clin-e-pos. 



70 DIVISION OF THE AGNOMACLADES. 

modified in sense by being declined in form; as, of, an, but, 
perfect, imperfect, accurately, accurate, all, any, &c. 

SPECIMEN. 

My, his, this, that, perfect, much, good, 4*c 

my, .... a clinepos, declined for its plural to our. 
his . . . .a clinepos, declined for its plural to their, 

this .... a clinepos, declined for its plural to these, 

that, .... a clinepos, declined for its plural to those, 

those, ... a clinepos, declined for its singular to that, 

perfect, ... a neclinepos. 

much, ... a clinepos — {much, more, most.) 

good, ... a clinepos — {good, better, best.) 

EXERCISES. 

Ooreetly,* soft, prudently, well, accordingly, badly, and, 
though, although, nearer, verily, sure, indeed, positively, 
no, not, nay, never, while, farther, many, near, why, rather, 
sooner, chief, especially, so, as, equally, thus, like, other- 
wise, else, differently, unlike, most, nearly, partially, partly, 
scarcely, hardly, sparingly, scantily, less, much, bountifully, 
liberally, best, worst, least, most, least, or, last, nearer, or 
next, farthest, foremost, or, first, gird, better, worst, perfect, 
evil, or, ill, best, less, little, much, therefore, and, yet, for- 
mer, bad, good, as, ill, side-wise, how, certainly, truly, un- 
doubtedly, yes, and, so, later, as, well, far, for, although, 
late, at, all, namely, universally, together, generally, con- 
junctively, off, separately, apart, asunder, singly, alone, 
apiece, again, though, for, yet, hereafter, already, hitherto, 
last, that, but, although, then, either, since, also, or, whereas, 
both, than, wherefore, besides, unless, beside, at, neverthe- 
less, lest, around, notwithstanding, dwelt, into, of, after, but, 
moreover, least, because, amongst, howbeit, across, not, 
only, nay, likewise, inasmuch, nathless, if, among, soon, 
primarily, previously, at, once, by, and. whereby, in, be, 
is, toward, shave, against, lor, behind, during, neither, 

*The word, correct, is a neclinepos, whether in the /?/ form or not. 
To constitute a word a clinepos, the » '.tut must l>o declined as well as 
the frame-work of the word itself. Un, as correct, and correctly mean 
the same thing, correcthj is a oeclinepoa, 



Subdivision of The clinepoi. 71 

unto, an, underneath, atvvixt, long, athwart, not, never, in, 
but, or, of, over, here, there, where, away, whereon, 
wherein, in, at, on, thither, whither, hitherward, whither- 
ward, hence, thence, gilt, thence, yet, otherwise, whether, 
or, even, wherever, out, forth, forthwith, of, to, ahead, be- 
hind, to, now, when, then, whenever, after, as, afore, never, 
ever, aforetime, about, straight, immediately, wherewith, 
thereby, first, secondly, thirdly, again, once, twice, perhaps, 
perad venture, likely, possibly. 



CHAPTER VI. 

SUBDIVISION OF THE CLINEPOI. 

The Clinepos family is divided under semenology into 
comparative clinepoi, and numeral clinepoi. 

1. COMPARATIVE CLINEPOI. 

1. A comparative clinepos is a clinepos which can have 
such a declension as indicates that the thing is considered 
with another thing; as, large, high, long, short. 

Note. If we decline large to larger, or largest, we shall see that 
this new form gives the idea that one thing is compared with another 
thing to decide the relative size of the two; as, this apple is larger than 
that. 

2. NUMERAL CLINEPOT. 

2. A numeral clin-e-pos is a clinepos whose declension 
indicates unity, or plurality; as, my land, our land, man's 
residence, men's abode. 

SPECIMEN. 

Good, this, that, his, high, #-e. 

good, better, best, .... a comparative clinepos. 

this, these, a numeral clinepos. 

that, those, a numeral clinepos. 



72 INDICATIONS OF THE COMPARATIVE CLINEPOI. 

his, their, a numeral clinepos. 

high, higher, highest, . . a comparative clinepos. 
more, much, more, most . . a comparative clinepos. 

EXERCISES. 

Its, her, our, my, lady's, man's, near, soon, boy's, their, 
your, red, yellow, white, much, short, new, old, black, 
blue, upper, lower, mine, yours, girls', boy's, tree's, trees', 
bitter, little, late, far, many, better, worse, less, more, least, 
farther, father's, fathers', uncle's, aunts', aunt's, next, worst, 
best, fore, former, latter, foremost, first, book's, books'. 



CHAPTER VII. 



INDICATIONS OF THE COMPARATIVE CLINEPOI. 

The indication of a comparative clinepos, is the relative 

amount of that thing of which the word is a name, or sign. 

The indications are three; viz: Sub, Supersub, Super. 

1. Sub; as, long P. D. 

2. Supersub; as, longer C. D. 

3. Super; as, longest S. D. 

!. Sub; as, short 

2. Supersub; as, shorter 

3. Super; as, shortest 

I The sub indication of a comparative clinepos, is the primitive 
state of the word, and, where two, or more tilings are spoken of as 
to their rclaticn amount of whatever the clinepos may mean, indicates 
the least; as, John is good; but Stephen is better; That tree is Mgh; 
but this is higher; James is sick; Jason is sicker; and Joseph is 
sickest, (positive degree.) 

II. The supersub indication is that derivative form, or that new 
word form which indicates an amount superior to that designated by 
the sub indication of the same word, but inferior to that amount 
which is indicated by the super indication of the same word; as, 
Stephen is better than John, This tree is higher than that, James is 
sick; Jason is sicker; but Joseph is sickest, (comparative degree.) 

III. The super indication is that derivative form, or that new word 



INDICATIONS OF THE COMPARATIVE CLINEPOS. 78 

form which indicates the highest amount as, James is sick; Jason 
is sicker, but Joseph is sickest, (superlative degrees) 

When the superior clade consists of more than one monogram, the 
indications are generally given to the inferior clade; as, more, or 
most, less or least righteous. 

Amphograms, dissyllables, ending in y, change y into i before er, 
and est; as, in happy, happier, happiest. 

But if a hypergram, a vowel, precedes, y is not changed into i, be- 
fore er, and est; as, gay, gayer, gayest. 

When the clade ends with a single consonant, preceded by a single 
vowel, the consonant is doubled before er, and est; as, big, bigger, 



The indications of some clades are made by affixing 
most to the radical state; as, upper, uppermost. 

There are many properties which, from their nature, are incapable 
of increase, or diminution; as, perfection, universality, straightness, 
&,c. The clades denoting these, have no indication of comparison; 
as, perfect, extreme. 

DECLENSION OF THE COMPARATIVE CLINEPOI. 

The declensions of the comparative clinepoi, are, 
I. General, and 2. Special. 

1. 'The general declension is the monogram, er, and est, affixed to 
the same word; as, large, larger, largest, High, higher, highest. 

2. The special declension is that which is restricted to certain 
words of the clinepos family; as, Good, better, best, Much, more, most, 
(Not good, gooder, goodest, Much, mucher, muchest.) 

Comparative clinepoi of the Special Declension. 

SUB. 

Good, 

Bad, evil, or ill, 

Little, 

Much, or many, 

Late, 

Near, 

Far, 

12 3 4 5 

Specimen. Better, Red, Newer, Old, First. 

1. Better, Sub, good — Supersub, better — Super, best, a comparative 

clinepos of the Supersub indication. 

2. Red, . Sub, red — Supersub, redder — Super, reddest, a compara- 

tive clinepos of the Sub indication. 

3. Newer, Sub, new — Supersub, newer — Super, newest, a compara- 

tive clinepos of the Supersub indication. 

4. Old, . Sub, old — Supersub, older — Super, oldest, a comparative 

clinepos of the Sub indication. 

G 



SUPERSUB. 


SUPER. 


Better, 


Best. 


Worse, 


Worst, 


Less, 


Least. 


More, 


Most. 


Later, 


Latest, or last. 


Nearer, 


Nearest, or ne> 


Farther, 


Farthest. 



74 SUBDIVISION OF THE NECLINEPOI. 

5. First, Sub, fore — Supersub, former — Super, foremost, or first, 
a comparative clinepos of the Supei indication. 

EXERCISES. 

Good, bad, ill, former, little, small, much, nigh, near, 
\vor e e, latter, many, late, further, less, first, foremost, red. 
good, high, low, much. 

For additional exercises, select all the numeral, and all 
the comparative clinepoi from the exercises under page 70. 

REMARKS. 

The three indications, (Sub, Supersub, Super,) are offered as a sub- 
stitute for the three degrees of comparison in the old system. Tht 
objections to this British contrivance are numerous; so much so that 
they can hardly be stated, much less sustained, in these few observa- 
tions. As a general reflection, we say that the contrivance is without 
simplicity, and without meaning, hence without the power of a tru« 
application to the subject which they desired to present to the mind 
of the student. Good, is said to be in the positive degree of com- 
parison. The phrase, "positive decree of comparison," is void of all 
import over which the human mind has any command. Besides, 
when it is said, Mr. Jones is a good man," is there any idea of com- 
parison? The idea is rather that of contrast. He is a good man, not 
a bad one. 

When it is said, " Mr. Jones is a better man than Mr. James," 
There is clearly an idea of comparison. But, then, the degree doc? 
not belong to the word better, but to Mr. Jones himself. The means 
of indicating, of pointing out this degree, belongs to the word, better. 
Besides, this word, better, is said to be of the comparative degree. 
Why, is not every degree of comparison a comparative degree? When 
it is said, "Mr. Jones is the best man of the six," is there no com- 
parison? And when it is said, " Mr. Jones is a good man," is there no 
comparison? how, then, can good be called the positive degree of com- 
parison? 



CHAPTER VIII. 

SUBDIVISION OF THE NECLINEPOI INTO 

1. Relative, and 

2. Absolute. 



THE TIMEDEX OF A GNOMACLADE. 75 

1 . The relative neclinepos is one which can denote rela- 
tive degrees of the same quality; as, sacred, delightful, 
pleasant, than. 

2. The absolute neclinepos is one which denotes some- 
thing that can neither be increased, nor diminished; as, 
universal, perfect, perfectly, supreme, sure, certain, 
straight, a, an, the, of, therefore, because, verily. 



The, certainly, delightful. 

The, . . an absolute neclinepos. 
Certainly, an absolute neclinepos. 
Delightful, a relative neclinepos. 

EXERCISES. 

True untrue when common 

False wrong then usual 

Perfectly right after unusual 

Imperfect surely general correct. 

REMARKS. 

Any word which is calculated either to increase, or diminish the 
degree of whatever is denoted by the relative neclinepos, may be con- 
jccted to it; as, more delightful, most delightful, less delightml. 

But, it is very improper to attempt to increase, or diminish the 
amount, or quantity of that which is denoted by an absolute necline- 
pos; as, more perfect, less perfect, most sure, positively assured, 
straighter, truer! 



CHAPTER IX. 

THE TIMEDEX OF A GNOMACLADE. (or rsaa.) 



REMARKS. 



The first gnomaclade, (or vere, - ) in a mono, has something about 
it, which points to time, and this something is denominated timedex, 
timeindex. Sometimes the timeindex is found in a tense signification 
which the gnomacladc has in addition to its proper Dictionary meaning. 



76 THE TIMEDEX OF A GNOMACLADE. 

For instance: will has no visible finger, no form by which it points 
to a period of future time. But although it is destitute of any visible 
future tense index; yet, it has an invisible one which enables it to 
point to future time with as much distinctness as any visible present 
tense index enables any gnomaclade, (or verb,) to point to present 
time: 

1. He attends. 

2. I will attend. 

Tense, and time arc synonymous words — both mean the thing to 
which the timedex of the gnomaclade, (or verb,) points. To say 
that a gnomaclade, (or verb,) is of the present tense, or to say that a 
gnomaclade, (or verb,) is of the present time, is to say that the word 
exists at this time! And to say that a gnomaclade, (or verb,) is of 
the future tense, is to say that the gnomaclade, (or verb,) does not 
yet exist, but that it will have a being at some future time! To say, 
however, that a gnomaclade, (or verb,) has a present tense index, or 
a future time index, is to say that it has an index, a finger, which 
points to present time, or which points to future time. 

Timedex. 

Timedex is the means which enables a gnomaclade, (or 
verb,) to point to different portions of time. 

This means generally consists in a certain form of the gnomaclade, 
(or verb); as, writes, wrote, do, did. 
But it may consist in a new word; as, am, was, go, went. 

And it may consist in an extra signification ; as, irill, shall. 
Will, as well as shall, has a Dictionary meaning — and, in addition 
to this, both words have an invisible future, or post time index. 

There are two general timedexes which belong to gnoma- 
clades. These, for the purpose of general distinction, may 
be denominated, the Speaking Timedex, and the Event 
Timedex. 

1. Speaking Timedex. 

The Speaking Timedex is that which points to the time 
in which one utters, or expresses the sentence; as, David 
said unto Nathan, "Thou art the man," 

Note. Here, art refers to the time in which David spoke tins s< n 
tence. The word, said, however, refers to the time of the event, not 
to the time when the mono in which said is employed, was uttered, or 
expressed. The speaking timedex may point to the time of the event; 
and it may not. For instance: " He is to pay the demand next vear," 



THE TIMEDEX OF A GNOMACLADE. 77 

is an instance in which the time of the event differs very much from 
the time of uttering the sentence. Again: *' He rides out daily," is an 
instance in which the time of the formation of the sentence, must dif- 
fer from that of the event itself Again: "Be thou at my house next 
week," is a case in which the time of the event, cannot be considered 
that of giving the command. And again: " He ought to return next 
spring," gives two different times. 

The old system says: 

" The present tense expresses what now exists, or is taking place; 
as, I hear a noise; somebody is coming." 

GOOLD BROWN. 

Goold Brown, revise, and correct thy "finished labors!!" 
Remember that revise, and correct are of the present tense — and do 
not forget that the present tense expresses what is now taking place! 

2. Event Timedex. 

The event timedex is that which points to the time of the 
event, and not to the time of expressing the sentence; as, 
The book ivas returned last week, The book has been re- 
turned to-day, The book had been returned before 1 called, 
The book will be returned next week, The book will have 
been returned two w*eeks next Saturday. 

The speaking timedex is denominated phemic timedex; 
and the event timedex is divided into rive timedexes. The 
umedexes of the gnomaclade, (or verb,) are divided, and 
named in the following manner: 

Phemic, Pre-syn-phemic, Pre-di-phemic, Pre-syn-di-phe- 
mic, Post-phemic, Pre-post-phemic. 

1. Phemic is from phemi, to speak, t o tell, and means 
speaking. Hence "-Phemic Timedex 1 '' is synonymous 
with " Speaking Timedex.''' Phemic Timedex, the time- 
dex which points to the speaking time, the time of speaking, 
the time in which the sentence is formed; as, I am here, 
come to me, John, 

2. Pre, before, prior. 

3. Syn, with, connected with. 

4. Di, distinct from, separate, asunder. 

4. Post, after, future, in respect to the time of speak- 
ing. 

Now, connect the secondary elements with the principal 
element according to the following order: 



THE TIMEDEX OF A GNOMACLADE. 



SECONDARY. PRINCIPAL. 

1. Pre- 1 



2. Pre-syn- 

3. Pre-di- 

4. Pre-sijn-di- 

5. Post- 

6. Pre-post- J 



u-. 



1st. Say, /Ve-phemic. 2d. Say, Pre-syn-phemic. And 
so on, till you become familiar with the six following 
words: 

T1MEDEXES. 

1. P hemic 

2. Pre-syn-phemic 

3. Pre-di-phemic . ,,,. , 
^ d . !• a • >/imedcz. 

4. rre-syn-di-phemic 

5. Post-phemic 

6. Pre-post-phemic 

EXPLANATION. 

1. Phemic, speaking. 

2. Pre-phemic, before speaking. 

2. *Sy?i-phemic, connected with the time of speaking. 

2. Pre-s?/>2-phemic, prior time, connected with the phe- 
mic, the speaking time. 

3. Zh'-phemic, separate from the phemic, the speaking 
time. 

3. Pre-di-phemic, time prior to, and distinct, or separate 
from the phemic, the speaking time. 

4. Syn-di-phe\mc, time connected with that which is 
separate from the phemic, the speaking time. 

4. Pre-syn-di-phemic, prior time, connected with that 
which is separate from the phemic, the speaking time. 

5. Pos/-phemic, after the phemic, the speaking time: 
hence future. 

6. Pre-/;os/-phemie, time prior to another post time. 

ILLUSTRATION. 

1. Phemic time: I hope you are well, sir. 

2. Pre-syn-phemic time: 1 have seen him to-day. 

3. Pre-di-phemic time: I saw him last week. 



THE TIMEDEX OF A GNOMACLADE. 79 

4. Pre-syn-di-phemic time: I had seen him before he 

called on me. 

5. Post-phemic time: I shcdl see him next week. 

6. Pre-post-phemic time: I shall have seen him by next 

week. 

1. PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

The Phemic Timedex is that which points to the lime of 
speaking, which may, or may not be the time of the event 
itself; as, He rides out weekly, John, call at my house 
next week. 

Note. As "phemic" means speaking, and as we can not speak in 
any time but the present, phemic very naturally comes to mean pre- 
sent. Should it be asked, why not use the word, "present" we an- 
swer that phemic has too obvious advantages over present. " Phemic'''' 
means a definite present — it means that very time, and that exact 
quantity of time, occupied in speaking. Hence the phrase "phemic 
time," is distinct, definite, simple, and applicable. Whereas, the phrase, 
"present time" is indistinct, indefinite, complex, and inapplicable. It 
is not in the power of man to decide how much time is meant by the 
phrase, "present time." 

It would seem that this day must be present time. But if so, the 
present becomes future; as, I will call on you this day. We say, too, 
the present year, the present age, &c. Now, if a whole age is present, 
where shall we get the past, and the future? We are compelled to 
cut the entire present age, or mass into parts for the past, and future, 
or take this entire age for the present time, the preceding age for the 
past, and all subsequent ages for the future! But an age that is pre- 
sent, can be made neither future, nor past by cutting it into smaller 
portions — an apple that is present is not made either past, or future 
by dividing it! 

2. The word, phemic, is a good base on which to compound other 
elements calculated to express the several nice relations which the 
other times alluded to jui speech, have with the speaking time. 
Whereas, the word, present, is a bad base for this purpose. 

The figures marked a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, are events: 
they are designed to represent all the events of which men- 
tion has ever been, or of which mention ever will be 
made. The sand in the Time-dex, marked S, represents 
speaking time; and that seen through the glasses repre- 
sents all the time which has ever been, and which ever 
will be. 

The events are denominated the pictorial events. This 
sand is styled the pictorial time. The manner in which 



80 THE TIMEDEX OF A GNOMACLADE. 

the pictorial time is divided by being presented in different 
Timedcxes, for the location of the pictorial events, is the 
pictorial manner in which the real time is divided by tho 
mind for the location of the real events of which mention 
may be made with respect to time. 

Figure S represents the Speaking time. That is, the 
time occupied in speaking, the time which is occupied in 
constructing the sentences which mention the different 
events that happen in the world. But from the fact that 
some events are located in the Speaking time, it is seen 
that the speaking time may be event, as well as speaking 
time. Some events are commenced, and finished in the 
speaking time. Others are begun in the speaking time, 
and completed in the j90s/-speaking time, as is repre- 
sented by figure W. Event a is commenced in figure S, 
and finished in figure W. All other events as may be seen 
from the location of the events in the pictorial time in figure 
V, and in the time of figure W, are placed into the purely 
event time. 

The speaking time is the only time which is present 
time, for this is the only time which is in our presence. 
The time which is prior to the speaking lime, as well as 
the time which is post to the speaking time, is made visi- 
ble: yet it is not present time, it is not in our presence — it 
has either gone by us; or it has not yet come to us. The 
time which had passed off before the speaking time came to 
us, as well as the time which is to come to us after the 
speaking time shall have left us, is a vast distance from 
us. So far from us that we are compelled to look through a 
Tensescope to behold them even with the eve of the mind. 



82 



THE TIMEDEX OF A GNOMACLADE. 



I. PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

The phemic timedex, (or present tense,) is that which 
points to the time in which the sentence is spoken, or 
formed; which may be all, some, or none of the time of 

all some. none. 

the event; as, 1 speak, virtue is commendable, Go thou to 
school. (See Timedex Up. 83.) 

1. The phemic timedex is either the primitive state of 
the gnomaclade, (or verb); as, write, walk, put. 

Or it is the s, es, st, and th termination; as, writes, write*/, 
write///, walks, walkes/, walke///, puts, puttes/, putte///. 
f Write — s, s/, ///. 
Phemic Timedex < Walk — s, es/, eth. 
I Put — s, tes/, ieth. 



II. PRE-SYN-PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

The pre-syn-phemic timedex, (or perfect tense,) in- 
dicates that the prior time to which it points, is taken in 
connection with the phemic time itself, as one of the three 
constituent parts which constitute the entire period to which 
the speaking time belongs; as, I have seen him this day. 
(See Timedex m, p. 83.) 

2. The presynphemic timedex is formed by placing 
have, has, hast, or hath before another gnomaclade, (or 
verb); as, have written, has written, hast written, hath 
written, may have written, <fcc, with a timedex mono, ex- 
pressed, or implied, including the time of the event, the 
time of speaking, and more or less post time; as, I could 
have gone: (this iveek.) 

(~1 have~] 

t> t« J Thou hast I , N 

Presynphemic 1imedex< „ , Written ( , , ) 

j He has \ v ' 

[_He hath J 
("may 

can 
| must 
Presynphemic Timedex^ might 

could 

would 
I should 



>havc written (t O-day.) 



84 THE TIMEDEX OF A GNOMACLADE. 

Note. It should be remarked here that may, can, must, &c, ha*t 
no agency in pointing out the time: this may be seen by removing 
these gnomaclades, (or verbs.) As, I have written to-day. Hcnct 
these gnomaclades, (or verbs,) do not constitute any part of the 
timedex. Nor does written form any part of the exact timedex. This 
may be seen by removing hate, and substituting had, or is — As, I 
had written, The letter is written. Had gives the pre&yndiphemic 
time; as, I had written before tins day came. And is gives the phemu 
lime; as, the letter is written. 

III. PRfrDI-PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

The pre-di-p hemic timedex, (or imperfect tense,] 
points to prior time, and indicates that the prior time to 
which it points, is considered separate from, or disconnected 
with, all other portions of time; as, I never drank better 
water — (when I was on earth.) [See Timedex n.) 

3. The prediphemic timedex is that modification which 
is produced in the primitive state of the gnomaclaue, (or 
verb,) by the ed monogram; as, walk, walked, love, loved: 

Or, by incorporating with, or casting from the primitive- 
stale, one, or more of the following timedex letters: a, d, e. 
i, o, t, u; as, bid, bade; pay, paid; blow, blew; do, did: 
get, got; leave, left; sting, stung. 



PHEMIC 


PREDIPHEMIC 


timedex. 


TIMEDEX. 


bid 


a e 


love 


ed 


walk 


ed 


pay 


id 


blow 


e 


do 


id 


get 





leave 


t 


sting 


u 



IV. PRE-SYN-DI-PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

The pre-syn-di'phemic timedex, (or pluperfect tense, ; 
is that which indicates that the time to which it points, 
is prior to, and connected with, the pre-di-phemic time; as. 
" I had seen him before he called on me." (See Time- 
dex o.) 



THE TIMEDEX OF A GNOMACLADE. 85 

The settled state of the sand of o, in connection with the unsettled 
state of that in n, indicates the idea of priority, denoted by pie, and 
also shows the ground of that connection which the prcsyndiphemic 
time has with the prediphemic. 

V. POST-PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

The post-phemic timedex, (or first future tense,) is 
that post time import which some gnomaclades, (or verbs,} 
have in addition to their dictionary signification; as, I will 
return. (83, p.) 

VI. PRE-POST-PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

The pre-post-pliemic timedex, (or second future tense,} 
is that which indicates that the lime to whicli it points, is 
post to the phemic time, but prior to some post time men- 
tioned in another mono of the same sentense; as, I shall 
have seen him (by ten o'clock.) (83, q.) 

CONCORDANCE OF THE PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

{Present Tense.) 

That the learner may have a just standard by which to decide all 
those cases in timedexes, concerning which he may have some doubts, 
I have furnished him with a full concordance under each timedex. 
In this he will find much aid in deciding all such instances as he mav 
not be able to settle by the definitions themselves. For instance: 
should he be unable to decide whether the timedex of desired is phemic 
or not in the following case: " I could return next week, if I desired 
it," he will be enabled to determine this by examining the cases whicii 
form the concordance under the Phemic timedex: for, if this caec is 
phemic, he will find either it, in this concordance, or a case which is 
exactly like it 

The Phemic Timedex, (or Present Tense) is that which 
points to the time in which the sentence is spoken, or 
formed, which may be all, some, or none of the time of the 

all. some. none. 

event; as, I speak, virtue is commendable, Go thou to 
school. (See Timedex I, p. 83.) 

1. " Thou art to be the next President." 

2. " Is he coming to the city soon?" 

3. " He is to return to America next year," 

4. " Go thou to school." 

5. Be thou here at the appointed hour. 

6. " I will — be thou clean." 

" I decree it — be thou clean." (I ivill it.) 
H 



86 THE TIMEDEX OF A GNOMACLADC. 

7. I can call in a few days. 

8. I may come next week. 

9. They must return next fall. 

10. I might return to-morrow if I would. 

11. I could go next year if I desired it. 

12. I would go now if I was not sick. 

13. Was I in good health, I surely would return to Bee- 

ton immediately. 

14. John should attend to his book at home. 

15. If he ivas well he would visit us. 

16. I wish we were now in Pennsylvania. 

17. Were we out of this place I should be much pleased — 

I would not be found here again! 

18. Had he a knife, he could make his own pens. 

19. Did he write a good hand, he might be employed m 

clerk. 

20. Was he now inclined to attend to his affairs properly. 

he might soon recover from his embarrassment. 

21. I told him to go to church. 

22. He is about to return to London. 

23. Were the papers here, we would proceed to business. 

24. " When the mail arrives, we shall get some news." 

25. Would he come if he could? 

26. I have a book. 

27. Thou hast a pen. 

28. He has a knife. 

29. 1 am to have a new book next week. 

30. Had he a book, I would give him a lesson. 

CONCORDANCE OF THE PRESYNPHEMIC TIMEDEI 

(Perfect Tense.) 

Pre, before, prior — Syn t with, in connection with, Vhemic, speaking 
time, the time of speaking. 

The presynphemic timed ex, (or perfect tense) indicate* 
that the prior time to which it points, is taken in connec- 
tion with the phemic time itself, as one of the three consti- 
tuent parts Which constitute the entire period to which the 
speaking time belongs; as, I have seen him this day. [See 
Timedex m, p. 83.) 

Note. Here the day is the entire period which, as hate indicate", 
consists of three constituent parts; namely, the part in which the act 






THE TIMEDEX OF A GNOMACLADE. 87 

t>f seeing took place, the part in which this act is spoken of; and the 
part which remains after the speaking- portion has passed off. 

CONCORDANCE'. 

1. I have written a book. ( . , *) 

2. Thou hast read the letter. ( , , ) 

3. He has, or hath been at church. ( , , ) 

4. He must have returned this iveek. 

5. He may have been here (this evening.) 

6. He might have been here (this year.) 

7. He could have gone (this week.) 

S. " He would have gone (this week) had the boat made 

a third trip." 
1). I have never drunk better water. 

Note. Where there is an allusion to a whole period of time whicli 
obviously consists of three component parts, viz. the event part, the 
speaking part, and the post-spea king- part, the Pre-syn-phemic timedex 
must be used; as, I never have drunk better water. 

Here the entire life is the period to which allusion is made. The 
part which is indicated as the prior, event part, is the portion which is 
past. The speaking part is that portion which is occupied in uttering 
the sentence; and the ^osf-speaking portion is that part which follows 
the speaking part. (See Timedex m, p. 83.) 

But if the period is all past, and is to be considered separate from, 
or disconnected with all other time, the Pre-di-phemic timedex must 
be used; as, " I never drank better water." 

Here the whole life is alluded to — and alluded to as having past 
prior to the time of uttering the sentence. Hence the former of the 
sentence throws himself out of this world, for his life has closed. And 
should this departed spirit be asked, " when he never drank better 
water," he must answer, " When I was in the body. That is, before I 
had taken up all my connections with the earth!" 

CONCORDANCE OF THE PREDIPHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

(Imperfect Tense.) 

The prediphemic timedex, (or imperfect tense) points to 
prior time, and indicates that the prior time to which it 
points, is considered separate from, or disconnected with, 
all other portions of time; as, I never drank better water, 
(when I was on the earth.) (83, n.) 

*The commas indicate some implied timedex mono; us, this day, 
ihii month, &C. 



88 



THE TIMEDEX OF A GNOMACLADE. 



CONCORDANCE. 



1. Thou wast the man. ( , , ) 

2. Was he coming to the city? ( , , ) 

3. He was to return (last year ) 

4. I had a book. ( , , *) 

5. Thou hadst a knife. ( , , ) 

6. " Had he come {last week,') he could have seen his 
brother." 



Note. In this, and in the following' instances, the lime of the event, 
is known to be pre-di-phemic by the prediphrmic mono, " last week," 
which forms a part of the sentence. (Sec Principle X.) 

7. If he had called (last evening) I would have gone to 
church with him. 

8. He may have written (last week.) 

9. He must have gone (last evening.) 

10. " He might have seen me (on Monday last,) had he 
called at my office." 

11. He could have seen me at home (in the evening) (of 
Saturday last.) 

12. He should have written (last evening.) 

13. He would return in despite of all his friends could 
say to him. 

14. He would not be consoled — and we could do nothing 
for him. (See Principle XII.) 

CONCORDANCE OF THE PRESYNDIPHEMIC TIMEDEX 

(Pluperfect Tense.) 

The pre-syn-di-phemic timedex, (or pluperfect tense) is 
that which indicates that the time to which it points, is 
prior to, and connected with, the predi-phemic time, as, 
"I had seen him before he called on me." (83, o.) 

* It is not necessary to have an expressed prist timedex mono to 
make had point to prist time. There is always a j>ast timedex mono 
implied in the past timedex of the gnomaclade itself. We should not 
say: She had a hook to-day, for had indicates that the time alluded to 
is all, every whit of it, j»ior to tint of speaking. Hence wc should say: 
She had a hook yesterday, last evenirrj, lust a-< ck, &c 






THE TIMEDEX OF A GNOMACLADE. 89 

CONCORDANCE. 

I. I had learned my lesson before I went to school. 

i. He had had the book two days when I called on him. 

3. He had been sick several days before he sent for his 
physician. 

4. He that had been dead, sat np, and began to speak. 

5. He may have been there before I arrived. 

6. He must have seen the man before this event hap- 
pened. 

7. I might, or could have seen the President before he 
came to Philadelphia. 

8. They would have seen the President before they left 
Washington, had he been at Washington at the time of their 
sojourn in that place. 

9. He should have done it before I came home. 

CONCORDANCE OF THE POST-PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

(First Future Tense.) 

The post-phemic timedex, (or first future tense) is that 
post time import which some gnomaclades have in addition 
io their Dictionary signification; as, I will return. (83, p.) 

CONCORDANCE. 

1. Will he lend me one thousand dollars? 

'2. Will you go with me? 

3. Will you take a piece of the pie? 

4. Wilt thou send me a piece of pudding? 

5. Shall I send you a piece of the pie? 

6. They shall fall upon you with arms. 

7. Thou shalt not steal. 

8. Should they come, we shall see them. 

9. He shall go, and that too in haste. 

10. If he should return, he will call on us. 

I I. I wish that he would come back. 

Note. Shall, and will are the only gnomaclades which uniformly 
have the posl-phemic timedex. Would, and should may have this 
timedex in such instances as those above, in which these words are in- 
troduccd. 

Wtfl lias the phonic timedex when it is not followed by another 
fftomaclade; as, " I will: be thou clean." 

h2 



90 THE TIMEDEX OF A GNOMACLADE. 

CONCORDANCE OF THE FREPOSTPHEMIC TIMEDEX 

(Second Future Tense.) 

The pre-post-phemic timedex, (or second future tense) is 
that which indicates that the time to which it points, is post 
to the phemic time, but prior to some post time mentioned 
in another section of the same sentence; as, I shall hen:' 
seen him (by ten o'clock.) (83, q.) 

CONCORDANCE. 

1. " I shall have dined at one o'clock." 

2. The two houses will have finished their business by 

the first of March. 

3. If he shall have come by seven o'clock, p. m., we shall 

have seen him by eight, p. m., of the same day. 

Note. It may not be improper to remark here that will, and shall 
mark the time as post to the phemic time — and that have marks it as 
prior to the other post time mentioned in the same sentence though in 
a different mono. Hence it is clear that shull, and have, or will, 
and have must both be employed in constituting the Pre-port-pbemk 
timedex. 



CHAPTER X. 

ON THE DISTINCTION OF REGULAR, AND IRREGULAR 
GNO.YIACLADES, OR VERBS. 



I do not know the exact number of verbs which the English pbre- 
nod has. At the lime Murray wrote, it seems, from his statement, thai 
there were 4,300. The number has v< ry probably increased to 6,000 
.-.ince the time of his calculation. Out of the 4,300, say fl Mr. Murray, 
there are but 177 irregular verbs. According to this calculation the 
proportion of irregular, to regular gnoinaclades, (or vkrbs,) was 177 
to 4,123. And it is do! probable that this proportion has been much 
changed by the introduction of new verbs into our phrenod The 
regular verb being that which forms its imperfect tense with the 
monogram, ed, it seems that this monogram is a very general past 
timedex — so much so indeed, that a distinguished grammarian, as 



REGULAR, AND IRREGULAR GNOMACLADES. 91 

says Mr. Murray, suggested the propriety of calling it the regular 
way of forming the imperfect tense — and all other ways the irregular 
way ! With great deference to the memory of Mr. Murray, and to 
the ipse dixit of this distinguished grammarian, I must be permitted 
to express my surprise that any scholar should suggest the use of 
regluar, and irregular upon so feeble a basis, as general, and special. 
Is a course regular because it is general? If so to sin is to lead a 
regular life ; and to refrain from iniquity is to lead an irregular life. 
\' Regular" seems to me to be nearly synonymous with right, accord- 
ing to rule, or some regulated, or established order, or plan. Now is 
it not right to form the past tense of do with id — did? If it is not 
right, it is wrongl Is not this way of forming the imperfect tense 
according to the regulated method of forming the imperfect tense of 
do? How, then, can it be said that id is an irregular method of form- 
ing this tense? 

Nor does the absurdity end here, for from the fact that some verbs 
form their imperfect tense in the general, or usual way, (ed), and 
others in a special way, the verbs themselves have come to be called 
Regular, and Irregular ! Thus loved, walked, &c, are right verbs 
— but did, was, had, wrote, &,c, are icrong verbs ! ! Why, is the cloth 
of a garment good, or poor according to the form, or fashion of the 
Qfarment? Is one verb a general verb because one of its tenses is 
lbrmed in the general way — and another verb a particular verb be- 
cause one of its tenses is formed in a special way !? 

DIVISION OF THE PREDIPHEMIC TIMEDEXES. 

The prediphemic timedexes may be denominated gene- 
ral, and special. 

1. The monogram, ed (not e d) is the general prediphe- 
mic timed ex: walked. 

2. The modifications which are produced by incorporat- 
ing with, or casting from, the radical state of the gnoma- 
clade, (or verb,) one, or more of the following timedex 
letters, are the special timedexes: do, did, write, wrote, 
id, o. (a, d, e, i, o, t, u.) 



Of the gnomnclades, or verbs in reference to their capacity, 

and their want of capacity, to receive the general, and 

the special prediphemic timedexes. 

Gnomaclades, or verbs are called edable, and inedable. 
(Regular, and Irregular.) 

I. That gnomaclade, or verb which can take the predi- 
phemic syllable, ed, is called edable, (or regular); as, walk, 
walked, love, \o\ed. 



92 REGULAR, AND IRREGULAR GNOMACLADES. 

2. That gnomaclade, or verb which cannot take the pre- 
diphemic syllable, ed, is called inedable, (or irregular); as, 
do, ivrite. (We cannot affix ed to do: doed: nor can we 
affix ed to write, write, writer/.) 

SPECIMEN. 

Debate, debated, an edable, (or regular) gnomaclade, 
(or verb.) 

Pay, paid, an inedable, (or irregular) gnomaclade, (or 
verb.) 

1. Why is pay inedable? Because it is incapable of tak- 
ing the monogram, ed, for its prediphemic timedex. 

2. Why is debate edable? Because it is capable of tak- 
ing the prediphemic monogram, ed. 

EXERCISES. 

Go, look, shake, flow, cry, lie, lay, say, be, do, punish, 
dug, did, see, am, was, put, cast, fast, read, rain, snow, 
fall, born, blow, run, bid, think, bring, fling, rules, feels, 
hears, speakest, sing. 

Note. It may be well to say in this place, that, in a few instances 
nontimedex letters are introduced. They are used merely to give the 
timedex letters admission: they are not strictly speaking, timedex in 
themselves. For instance, in left, we have /with the t. But, then, / 
is a mere substitute for ave — this substitution is necessary to the ad- 
mission of t, for we can not incorporate t with leave — leavet. 

These instances fall perfectly within the definition of the special 
prediphemic timedexes. 

The special prediphemic timedexes are those modifications which 
are produced in the radical state of the gl<>maclade by incorporating 
with, or casting from it one, or more of the following timedex letters: 
a, d, e, i, o, t, u. 

Now, as the / modification is produced by incorporating the /, this; 
case comes as fully up to the principle of the definition as does do: did. 

REMARK. 

It may be well enough to remark here that went is the prediphemic 
of go; was of am; and were of are. {New words, instead of modifi- 
cations of the primitive state.) 



DIVISION OF GNOMACLADE FORMS, &C. 93 



CHAPTER XI. 

DIVISION OF THE GNOMACLADE, OR VERB FORMS 
WITH RESPECT TO THEIR ABILITY TO POINT TO 
TIME. 

The forms, or modifications of a gnomaclade, or verb, 
may be called Timedex forms, and Nontimedex forms. 

1. The timedex forms, (or timedex modifications) of 
a gnomaclade, are those which point to time; as, write, 
writest, ivrites, writeth, wrote, zvrotest, Love, lovest, loves, 
loveth, loved, lovedst, Be, am, art, is, are, was, wast, were. 
Puts, puttest, putteth, put. 

2. The nontimedex forms, (perfect, and present partici- 
ple) of a gnomaclade, do not of themselves point to any 
fixed division of time; as, ivritten, ivriting, Loving, Being, 
Putting. 

How formed? The nontimedex forms are produced by 
incorporating en, ne, n, u, or ing either with the radical 
state, or with the prediphemic timedex of the gnomaclade; 
as, written, gone, flown, begun, going. 

Division of the Nontimedex forms with respect to the state 
of the gnomaelades with ivhichthey are incorporated. 

The nontimedex forms are en, ne, u, n, and ing, to- 
gether with the particular modifications which are pro- 
duced in rejecting, exchanging, or doubling certain other 
letters in order to render it possible to incorporate en, ne, ??, 
u, and ing with the gnomaelades; as, written, writings 
putting. (Not, icritcn, writeing, puting.) 

1. Radical Nontimedex. (Present Participle.) 

2. Prediradical Nontimedex. (Perfect Participle.) 

1. The radical nontimedex, (or present participle) is 
that form which is always incorporated with the radical 
stale of the gnomaclade, or verb; as, \odking, being, see- 
ing, running, [yrig.) 

2. The Predi-radical nontimedex, (or perfect participle) 
is that form which can be incorporated both with the predi- 



94 HAV1BLE, INHAVIBLE, BEABLE, 

state of the gnoma- 



phemic timedex, and with the radical 
clades. 



Note. " Predi-radical" is constructed from prediphemic, and 
radical, and is synonymous with, Prediphemic and radical, taken 
together. 

N. B. The first column presents instances ill which the predi- 
radical nontimedex is incorporated with the pred.phemic timedex. 
The second column presents instances in which the prediradical non- 
timedex, (or perfect participle) is incorporated with the radical state 
of the gnomaclade. 



1T.EDIPHEMIC. 


RADICAL. 


NONTIMEDEX. 


Forgot 


en, 


fall 


en, 


en, 


Hid 


en, 


wax 


en, 


en. 


Trod 


en, 


load 


en, 


en, 


Chid 


en, 


write 


en, 


en, 


Bore, 


ne, 


be 


en, 


en, 


Forbore 


ne, 


do 


ne, 


ne, 


Stole 


n -> 


g° 


ne, 


ne, 


Spoke 


n, 


blow 


"i 


n, 


Wove 


n > 


saw 


ft, 


n, 


Rang 


tfi 


rise 


n, 


n, 


Drank 


u, 


ring 


"> 


v, 


Flew 


o, n, 


drink 


w, 


m, 






bear 


o, n, 


o, n, 



CHAPTER XII. 



1. HAVIBLE FORM. 2. INHAVIBLE FORM. 3. BEABLE 
FORM, 4. AND INBEABLE FORM OF Gnomaclades, {or 

Verbs.) 

1. Havible form. The form which can receive have 
under any one of its modifications, is a havible form; as, 
I have put, He has written, Thou hadst walked. (Not, 
have puts, has wrote, lias write, hadst walk, nor hadst 
walking. 

2. Inhavible form. The form which cannot take have 
is the inhavible form; as, I have putting, He lias puts. 



AND INBEABLE FORM. 95 

3. Beable form. The beable form is any form which 
can take be with all he's variations; as, Be written, is writ- 
ing, were put, were putting. 

4. Inbeable form. The inbeable form is that which 
can not receive be with all fee's variations; as, Be wrote, 
been wrote, was puts, am saw, are broke, is froze. 

I. HAVIBLE FORM. 

i. The havible form is, first, the predi-radical nontimedex; as, im-if- 
fen; Secondly, the derivative prediphemic timedex; as, paid, loved; 
Thirdly, the primitive prediphemic timedex; as, put, burst, let, come, 
bid. 

The Havible form is, first, the predi-radical nontimedex 
of such gnomaclades as can have this nontimedex; as, 
written, trodden, laden, fallen, beaten; Secondly, the 
derivative prediphemic timedex of such gnomaclades as can 
not have the predi-radical nontimedex; as, paid, loved', 
Thirdly, the primitive prediphemic timedex of such gnoma- 
clades as have no derivative prediphemic form ; as, put, 
cost, let; And, fourthly, the primitive state of such gnoma- 
clades as often use their primitive state for their derivative 
prediphemic timedex; as, bid for bade, forbid for forbade, 
come for came. 

II. BEABLE FORM. 

The beable form is, first, any non-timedex ; as, written, writing; 
Secondly, the derivative prediphemic timedex; as, paid, loved; Thirdly, 
the primitive prediphemic timedex; as, put, burst, let, come. 

The beable form, is, first, arjy non-timedex; as, written, 
writing, trodden, treading, laden, lading, fallen, falling: 
Secondly, the derivative prediphemic timedex of such 
gnomaclaites as can not have the predi-radical nontimedex: 
as, paid, loved; Thirdly, the primitive prediphemic timedex 
of such gnomaclades as have no derivative prediphemic 
form; us, put, cost, let; And, fourthly, the primitive state 
of such gnomaclades as often substitute their primitive state 
for their derivative piediphemic timedex; as, bid for badt . 
forbid for forbade, come for came. 

The havible form, and the beable form is produced by incorporating 
the following frame-work modifiers with gnomaclades, or verbs. 



&6 HAVIELE, INHAVIBLE, BEABLE, AND IXBEABLE FORM. 

d, ed, en, ght, ne, ing, o, oo, ou, t, u. 

, , , ^ have. made. 

\. d - - - - make 

2. d - 

3. d - 

4. ed - 

5. en - - write, wrote 

„ , . .i • l ^ has thought. 

6. ght - - - think, < . ., . ,. e 
b * Its thinking. 







7. ne 



8. o - - - - get, 



[ has gone. 
[ is going. 
j has got. 
> is getting. 



n , C has stood. 

9. oo - - - - stand, < . ' . ,- 

( is standing. 

Ut.au-.-'- grind Ste*f>routi. 

& <> i5 grinding. 

, , . ii^ /*a/A few*. 

11. t ---- lend, ^ . , .. 

? is lending. 



12. u - - - - hang, 



J Aas hung. 
[ is hanging. 



REMARK. 

There are some gnomacladcs which arc neither havible, nor beable; 
as, may, can, ought. That is, have, and fee can not precede them: 
for we can not say, have can, be might; though we do say, can havr, 
can be. 

Another peculiarity of these gnomacladcs, is that they will not 
receive have, and be even after them in any other form thao have, and 
be, for we do not say, He can has written, Thou might hast written. 
Nor do we say, He can is there, I can am here. But we say, he can 
be there, I can be here. The gnomacladcs, which can not take have, 
and be before them, nor even after them, except in the primitive state, 
are restricted in their conjectivc relation to the poecorme. 

1. Is the radical nontimedex a havible form? 

2. Is the radical nontimedex a beable form? 



PANPOE-IC GNOMACLADES. ' 97 

3. Are there any gnomaclades, or verbs which can not 
take have, and be before them? 

4. Can these gnomaclades take have, and be after them? 

5. Can the gnomaclades which reject have, and be from 
before them, take have, and be after them in all the forms 
of have, and be? 



CHAPTER XIII. 

PANPOE-IC GNOMACLADES. {Auxiliary Verbs.) 

A panpoeic gnomaclade, (or auxiliary verb) is one which 
is always confined in its conjective, or frame' work relation 
to the poecorme; as, I can read, He shall return the book. 
(Pante, always, and poecorme, Panpoe-ic.) 

may, might, ought, 

can, could, will, 

must, would, shall, 

should, 

Note. Would, and will may be used so as to be dieormic; as, 
w And he would not that any man should know it." We will that 
execution be done." 

1. I - - - - ought to return. 
Note. Ought denotes a state of obligation, or duty. 

2. I - - - - may be at home. 
Note. — May expresses a state of probability, or possibility. 

3. I - - - - can be at home. 
Note. — Can denotes a state of possibility. 

4. You ... may go out, Charles. 
Note. May denotes a state of freedom, or liberty. 

5. I - - - - would that all would come. 
Note. Would denotes the state of the mind. (Dieormic.) 



y» PANPOE-IC GNOMACLADES. 

6. You - should write to your brother. 
Note. Should denotes a state of obligation, arising from duty. 

7. He - - - would not read. 

Note. Would denotes a state of the mind, arising from resolution, 
or determination. 

8. They - might, or could read. 
Note. Might, as well as could, denotes a state of possibility. 

9. They - might have been sick; but I 

doubt it. 
Note Might denotes a state of possibility. 

10. May - May you find your friends well. 
Note. May denotes a state of the mind, arising from a wish. 

11. I - - - - must return to-day. 

Note. Must denotes a state of compulsion, necessity, or obligation. 

12. I - ivillnoi work withoutarewani. 

Note. Will denotes a state of the mind, arising from resolution, or 
determination. 

13. - - - - Shall I send you a little of the 

pudding? 

Note. Shall alludes to the state of the person's mind, as to receiv- 
ing some of the pudding. Shall I send? that is, what is the state of 
your mind? The same word, and that too in the same example, relates 
to a state of permission or liberty. Shall I send? that is, am I free, 
or at liberty to send you a little of the pudding? 

14. Hill you have some of the pie? 

Note. Will alludes entirely to the state of the person's mind who 
is addressed. Will you have? that is, what is the state of your mind 
as it respects having a piece of the pic. 

1. If he is able, he shall aid his friends. 

2. I will pay you to-morrow. 

3. I will make thee a great nation. 
Promises. *^ 4. We will come to morrow. 

5. He says that he will bring Goldsmith's 
Rome to-morrow. 
Jo. You say you will certainly come. 



DIVISION OF THE INEDABLE GNOMACLADES. 99 



f 1. Thou shalt not steaL 
2. Thou s^aft not bear false witness. 
Commands. <j 3. But of the tree of knowledge, ye shall not 
eat. 
\jL. Thou shalt write, 

f 1. In the day that ye eat thereof, ye shall 
Threatens. < surely die- 

^2. The soul that sinneth, shall die. 

f"l. Should it rain, we shall remain at home. 

^ « J 2. I s/m// have a book to-morrow, 

j 3. We shall return next week. 

\j±. Was I to run, I should be fatigued. 

SHALL. 

Note 1. Shall, in the formative indication, only foretells; as I shall 
go to-morrow. 

2. In the auditive, and in the sinefunctional indication, shall pro- 
mises, commands, or threatens ; as, you shall be rewarded, They 
shall be paid, Thou shalt not steal, The soul that sinneth, shall die. 

WILL. 

Note 1. Will, in the formative indication, denotes a promise, or a 
resolve; as, I will call at your office in the evening, I will not let 
thee go. 

2. In the auditive, and in the sinefunctional, will generally foretells; 
as, He will call at my house to-morrow. 

Correct the following. 

il I will drown; for no one shall come to help me out." 



CHAPTER XIV. 

DIVISION OF THE INEDABLE GNOMACLADES, (or Regular 
Verbs.) 

The inedable gnomaclades, (or irregular verbs) may be 
divided into several classes in reference to thnedexes, and 
nontimedexes: 

1. Sin-e-nontimedex Pante Phemics, 



100 DIVISION OF THE INEDABLE GNOMACLADES. 

2. Sinenontimedex Post Phemics, 

3. Sinenontimedex Sense Prediphemics, 

4. Radical Nontimedex Primitive Prediphemics, 

5. Radical Nontimedex Derivative Prediphemics, 

6. Jimbi Nontimedex Derivative Prediphemics, and 

7. Ambi Nontimedex Nonderivative Prediphemics. 

1. What is the import of the title, " Sin-e-non-time-dex- 
uante phemics?" This title means that the gnomaclades 
which are classed under it, are without a nontimedex form, 
and that they are always of the phemic timedex. (Si?*e, 
without; Pante, always. 

I. SINE-NONTIMEDEX PANTE-PHEMICS. 

Phemic. Phemic. 

Away, up (rise,) 

Can, wist (to know,) 

Lo, (see,) wit (to wit,) 

Off, wot (to know.) 
Ought. 

1. " Away , with him." 

2. I can write. 

Note. To say, I can have written is neither sense, nor English. 

3. " Off , with his head." 

4. '• Up ' , let , us be going." 

5. "He ought to write to his brother." 

Note. It is obvious that those grammarians who, with Mr. Mur- 
ray, assert that ought may have a past time, are in error. To say, 
" He ought to have written to his brother, is to affirm that it is his 
duty to do an act which is represented as having been done by him 
prior to the existence of the duty. 

II. SINENONTIMEDEX POST-PHEMICS. 

Will. 
Shall. 

1. What is the meaning of the title, " Sinenontimedex 
postphemics?" This title means that the gnomaclades 
which are classed under it, are without a nontimedex form 
and that their timedex form is post-phemic. (Post, after.) 



DIVISION OF THE INEDABLE GNOMACLADES. 



101 



III. SINENONTIMEDEX SENSE PREDI-PHEMICS. 



May, 
Must, 
Might, 



Could. 

Would. 

Should. 



" Sense prediphemic." That is, the prediphemic time 
of may, must, might, could, would, and should is deter- 
mined not by the shape of the words, but by the sense of 
the proposition. 

IV. RADICAL NONTIMEDEX PRIMITIVE PREDIPHEMICS. 

These inedable gnomaclades have the Radical Nontime- 
dex only: and their prediphemic timedex is their pri- 
mitive state; as, the boiler burst last week." (Not 
bursted.) 



Beset 


Burst 


Dispread 


Knit 


Bet 


Cast 


Forecast 


Must 


Beware 


Chat 


Hit 


Put 


Bespread 


Cost 


Hurt 




Rid 


Cut 


Let 




Set 


Shut 


Thrust 




Shed 


Split 






Shred 


Spread 
Sweat 


Wet 





Note. Beat, bid, knit, quit, and slit may be so used as to entitle: 
them to a place in this class of gnomaclades. 



V. RADICAL NONTIMEDEX DERIVATIVE PREDIPHEMICS. 



Phemic. 


Prediphemic. 


Phemic. 


Prediphemic 


Abide 


abode 


Fling 


flung 


Behold 


beheld 


Get 


got 


Bend 


bent 


Grind 


ground 


Beseech 


besought 


Hang 


hung 


Bind 


bound 


Have 


had 


Bleed 


bled 


Hear 


heard 


Breed 


bred 


Hold 


held 


Bring 


brought 


Keep 


kept 


Buy 


bought 


Lay 


laid 


Dare 


durst 


Lead 


led 


DweH 


dwelt 


Leave 


left 


Feed 


fed 


Lend 


lent 


Feel 


felt 


Lose 


lost 


Fight 


fought 


Make 


made 


Find 


found 


Mean 


meant 


Flee 


fled 


Meet 


met 



1 2 



102 



DIVISION OF THE INEDABLE GNOMACLADES. 



Prediphemic. 
spent 
spun 
stood 
stuck 
stung 
stunk 
strung 
swept 
swung 
taught 
told 

thought 
wept 
won 
wound 
wrung 



Although the following gnomaclades are cclablc, they may have the 
Special, as well as the general, (ed,) prediphemic timedez — for we say, 
He dug a place as well as, he digged a place. These words, however, 
have but one timedex: hence they are not removed from the class of 
11 Radical Nontimedex Derivative Prediphemics." Still, to enable the 
teacher, and learner to speak with brevity, and distinctness of" these 
words, it may be well to add hi, (both,) to the general title or name 
of the whole class — Hence these few members of the Radical Nor. 
timedex Derivative Prediphemics, will be denominated: 

VI. RADICAL NONTIMEDEX DERIVATIVE BI-PREDIFHEMICS. 



P hemic. 


Prediphemic. 


Phemic 


Pay 
Read 


paid 
read 




Spend 
Spin 


Rend 


rent 




Stand 


Ride 


rode 




Stick 


Say 
Seek 


said 
sought 




Sting 
Stink 


Sell 

Send 

Shoe 


sold 
sent 
shod 




String 
Sweep 
Swing 


Shoot 


shot 




Teach 


Shrink 


shrunk 




Tell 


Sink- 


sunk 




Think 


Sit 
Sleep 
Sling 
Slink 


sat 
slept 
slung 
slunk 




Weep 
Win 
Wind 
Wring 


Speed 


sped 


REM 


ARK. 






Bi-prediphemic8. 



Phemic. 


Bipre 


■ di-p/umic. 


Nontimedex 


Bereave 


bereaved 


bereft 


bereaving 


Build 


builded 


built 


building. 


Catch 


catched 


caught 


catching. 


Clothe 


clothed 


clad 


clothing. 


Deal 


dealed 


dealt 


dealing. 


Dig 


digged 


dug 


digging. 


Gild 


gilded 


gilt 


gilding. 


Gird 


girded 


girt 


girding. 


Shine 


shined 


shone 


shining. 


Work 


worked 


wrought 


working. 



Hang, and dare are not considered Bi-prediphemics . 
Hang, to hang ap, is not capable of receiving cd, the gene- 
ral prediphemic timedex. And hang, to take away life by 



DIVISION OF THE INEDABLE CNOMACLADE3. 



103 



hanging, always has the general, (ed) prediphemic timedex; 
as, He was hanged. 

Dare, to venture, is not edable: hence it can not have 
both prediphemic timedexes. We do not say, he dared 
go; but, he durst go. And dare, to challenge, is edable 
without the power to be otherwise. We do not say they, 
durst us to meet them; but, they dared us to meet them. 

VII. AMBI NONTIMEDEX ED PREDIPHEMICS. 

That is, these gnomaclades have both nontimedexes, and 
form their prediphemic timedex with the monogram, ed. 



P hemic. 


Prediphemic. 


Nontimedex. 


Grave 


graved 


graven, graving, 


Engrave 


engraved 


engraven, engraving. 


Hew 


hewed 


hewn, hewing. 


Load 


loaded 


laden, loading, 


Mow- 


mowed 


mown, mowing. 


Rive 


rived 


riven, riving. 


Saw 


sawed 


sawn, sawing. 


Shape 


shaped 


shapen, shaping. 


Shave 


shaved 


shaven, shaving. 


Shear 


sheared 


shorn, shearing. 


Show 


showed 


shown, showing. 


Sow 


sowed 


sown, sowing. 


Strow or Strew 


strowed or strewed 


strown, strowing, &c. 


Swell 


swelled 


swollen, swelling. 


Thrive 


thrived 


thriven, thriving. 


Wax 


waxed 


waxen, waxing. 



VIII. AMBI NONTIMEDEX DEFilVATIVE PREDIPHEMICS, 
{Both nontimedexes, and a derived prediphemic timedex.) 



Phemic. 




Prediphemic. 


Nontimedex. 


Awake 




awoke 


awaken 


Bear (to 


carry) 


bore 


borne 


Bear (to 


bring forth .) 


bare 


born 


Begin 




began 


begun 


Blow 




blew 


blown 


Break 




broke 


broken 


Choose 




chose 


chosen 


Come 




came 


come 


Do 




did 


done 


Draw 




drew 


drawn 


Drive 




drove 


driven 


Drink 




drank 


drunk 


Fall 




fell 


fallen 



10 i 



DIVISION OF THE INEDABLE GNOMACLADES. 



Phemic. 

Fly 

Forbear 

Forsake 

Freeze 

Give 

Go 

Grow 

Know 

Lie 

Partake 

Rise 

Run 

See 

Shake 

Slay 

Slide 

Smite 

Speak 

Steal 

Stride 

Strive 

Swear 

Take 

Tear 

Throw 

Tread 

Wear 

Weave 

Write 



Prediphemic. 


Nontimedez. 


flew 


flown 


forbore 


forborne 


forsook 


forsaken 


froze 


frozen 


gave 


given 


went 


gone 


grew 


grown 


knew 


known 


lay 


lain 


partook 


partaken 


rose 


risen 


ran 


run 


saw 


seen 


shook 


shaken 


slew 


slain 


slid 


slidden 


smote 


smitten 


spoke 


spoken 


stole 


stolen 


strode 


stridden 


strove 


striven 


swore 


sworn 


took 


taken 


tore 


torn 


threw 


thrown 


trod 


trodden 


wore 


worn 


wove 


woven 


wrote 


written 



IX. AMBI NONTIMEDEX PROXY FHEMS-PREDIPHEMS. 

That is, these gnomaclades have both nontimedexes; as. 
been, being, and mark their phemic, and prediphemic time 
by the substitution of other words, be am, am was. (JVo/ 
Be beed, am amed.) 



hemic. 


Prediphemic. 


Nontimedex. 


Be 


was 


been 


Am 


was 


been 


Art 


wut 


been 


Arc 


were 


been 
being 



The circumstance which classifies the gnomaclades under 
this title, is that they procure their phemic, and predi- 
phemic timedex by substitution instead of variation; as, be. 



DIVISION OF THE INEDABLE GNOMACLADES. 105 

am, was. Be with its two variations, and with its differ- 
ent substitutes, constitutes the entire class. 

Be has but three forms, namely, be, being, and been. 
Been is havible, and beable. It is said in the old system, that 
am, art, is, was, wast, and were are so many forms of be. 
Am, art, &c, are not forms of be: for they are new, and 
distinct words ! These words are substitutes: am is a sub- 
stitute for be: for, in the order of indication, we leave be 
upon the introduction of I; as, 1 am. (Not I be.) 

In leaving / for thou, we do not say, thou am; but thou 
art. Hence in the second step of indication, we substi- 
tute art for am: art, then, is a substitute for am; as, I am, 
thou art. 

In the third step in indication, we substitute is for art; 
as, Thou art, He is. 

In leaving the singular poecorme for the plural, are is 
used instead of am, art and is; as, 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

I am, We are, 

Thou art, Ye are, 

He is, They are. 

Are, then, is a substitute for am, art, and is. 

Having shown the proxy relation of these substitutes, 
one to another, in the phemic time, it may be well to say a 
word, or two upon the relation of the set of proxies which 
are used in the prediphemic time. This set consists of 
was, wast, and were. 

To denote prediphemic time we do not say, I amed; but 
we substitute was for am; as, I am now, I was then. 

Nor do we, to denote prediphemic time, say, Thou 
arted; but we substitute wast; as, Thou art now, Thou 
wast then. 

And to form the prediphemic timedex of is, we do not. 
say ised; but we substitute ivas for is; as, He is now, He 
was then. 

In the prediphemic time, then, ivas is a substitute for 
am, art, and is. 

Now, as in passing from the phemic, to the prediphemic 
timedex, was is a substitute for am, art, and is, so in leav- 
ing the singular poecorme for the plural, were is a substi- 
tute for was; as, 



106 



DIVISION OF THE INEDABLE GNOMACLADES. 



SINGULAR. 

I was, 
Thou wast,* 
He was. 



PLURAL. 

We were, 
Ye were, 
They were. 



Note. It may be well to say here that neither of the nontimedcxcs 
of be, is a beable form, for we do not say, I must be been, I am been, 
I am being. 

It is not unfrequently the case that wc meet with instances in which 
the radical nontimedex is made beable; as, the house is being built; the 
house must be being built. 

This form of expression is contrary to the genius of our phrenod; 
though it is not contrary to good sense. Nor is it contrary to good 
sense to say, " me am sick;" but it is contrary to the genius of the 
English phrenod. Let men cease to say, therefore, that because this 
form of speech, " the house is being built," is sense, it is English ! 

AMBI NONTIMEDEX DERIVATIVE FUGITIVE PREDIPHEMICS. 

That is, these gnomaclades have both nontimedexes, and 
a derivative prediphemic timedex: but as their prediphemic 
timedex is not used with any stability, these gnomaclades 
are said to be fugitive in their prediphemic timedex. In 
some instances the phemic is used instead of the derivative 
prediphemic; as, bid for bade, come for came. 

In others the prediradical nontimedex is used instead of 
the derivative prediphemic timedex; as, swum for swam, 
sung for sang. 



Phemic. 


Prediphemic. 


Nontimedex. 


Bid 


bade 


bidden 


Bite 


bit 


bitten 


Cleave (to split) 


clove 


cloven 


Chide 


chid 


chidden 


Eat 


ate 


eaten 


Forbid 


forbade 


forbidden 


Forget 


forgot 


forgotten 


Hide 


hid 


hidden 


Ring 


rang 


rung 


Sing 


sang 


sung 


Spit 


spat 


spitten w 


Spring 


sprang 


sprung 


Swim 


swam 


swum 



* Wast is not a substitute for was — for the t inflection is a mere 
rariation of was, which is produced by the indication of thou. 



DIVISION OF THE INEDABLE GNOMACLADES. 107 

SUBDIVISION OF THE AMBI NONTIMEDEX DERIVATIVE FUGITIVE 
PREDIPHEMICS. 

I. Phemics Pro-prediphemics, and Phemic Pro-prediradi- 
cals. 

Phemic. 
Bid 
Eat 
Forbid 



Prediphemic. 




Prediradical JSoniimedex 


r bade 


and 


for 


bidden. 


r ate 


and 


for 


eaten. 


r forbade 


and 


for 


forbidden. 


II. Phemic- 


pro-p) 


edi-phemics. 


J hemic. 






Prediphemic. 


Bid 






bid 


Come 






come 


Eat 






eat. 


Forbid 






forbid 


Spit 






spit 



Bade, come, forbade, ate, and spat are the true pr edi- 
phemics of bid, come, eat, forbid, and spit. 

III. Pre-di- radical Pro-prediphemics. 

Phemic. Prediphemic. Nontimedcx. 
Ring rang rung rung- 
Sing sang sung sung 
Swim swam swum swum 

IV. Prediphemics Pro-prediradicals. 

Phemic. Prediphemic. 

Chide chid 

Cleave (to split) cleft clove 

Hide - hid 

Forget forgot 

Spit spat 

Bite bit 





Nontimedex. 


for 


chidden 


for 


cloven 


for 


hidden 


for 


forgotten 


for 


spitten 


for 


bitten 



REVIEW BY QUESTIONS. 
Part I, Chapter I, Gnomeology. {Page 15.) 

1. What is gnomeology? (Gnome, a sentence, and lo- 
gos, doctrine, principle.) • 

2. What is a gnomod, or sentence? 



108 REVIEW BY QUE9TIONS. 

3. Of how many things does a gnomod consist? 

4. What are the words? 

5. What is the cordiction? 

6. Into how many parts is a gnomod divided? 

7. What is the gnometory? 

8. Which part of the example, " It is nine," is the 
gnometory? 

9. Which part of this example is the agnometory? 

10. What is an agnometory? page 16. 

11. Have you read with care the note under page 16? 

12. Have you paid proper attention to the questions un- 
der page 17? 

Part II, Chapter I, Monology. {Page 19.) 

1. What is monology? 

2. What is a mono? {Monos, alone, by itself.) 

3. Can you repeat the monological rules under page 19? 

Chapter II, Order of Monos. {Page 20.) 

1. Upon what principle are monos divided into orders? 
{p. 20.) 

2. How many orders are there? (;;. 20.) 

3. What is the gnomecorme? {p. 21.) 

4. What is the clad? (/;. 21.) 

5. What relation does the gnomecorme bear to the clad? 
{p. 21.) 

6. What relation do the clads bear to the gnomecorme? 
(p. 21.) 

7. Can yon repeat the rule by which you can distin- 
guish the gnomecorme from a clad? {p. 21.) 

8. What does the second rule concern? {p. 21.) 

9. Can the gnomecorme ever become a clad? {p. 22.) 

10. In what way can a clad become the gnomecorme? 
(/;. 22.) 

11. How may the gnomecorme be distinguished from the 
clads? {p. 22.) 

12. How many clads are there in a sentence which can 
occupy the first place? (p. 22.) 



REVIEW BY QUESTIONS. 



1G9 



Chapter III, Relations of Clads. (Page 23.) 

1. What do the relations of clads, respect? (p. 23.) 

2. How many relations have clads? (p. 23.) 

3. What clad is of the unirelation? (p. 24.) 

4. What clad is of the plmr elation? (p. 24.) 

5. What is connective reading? (p. 34.) 

6. Every clad of the unirelation must be conjected to 
what? Q». 24.) 

7. Every clad of the plusrelation must be conjected to 
what? (p. 24.) 

Chapter IV, Division oe the Clads. (Page 26.) 

1. From what character are clads divided into gnome- 
clads? (p. 26.) . 

2. From a z#cm£ of what character are clads divided into 
agnomeclads? (p. 26.) 

3. What is a gnomeclad? (p. 26.) 

4. What is an agnomeclad? (p. 27.) 

5. What is every clad with which not can be incorpo- 
rated? (p. 27.) 

6. What is every clad with which not can not be incor- 
porated? (p. 27.) 

Chapter V, State, and course of Monos. (Page 29.) 

1. What are the states of a mono called? (p. 29.) 

2. What is the plenary, what is the implenary, what is 
the broken, what is the unbroken state? (p. 29.) 

3. Are some gnomecormes incapable of being divided? 
And is this the case with any gnomeclads? (;;. 29.) 

4. What is said of agnomeclads with respect to their di- 
visibility? (p. 29.) 

5. What does the eourse of a mono respect? (p. 29.) 

6. What is the direct, what is the oblique, and what is 
the circumflex? (p. 29.) 

7. What is said of as, when, whenever, &c. under page 
30? 

Part III, Chapter I, Syncratology. (Page 31.) 

1. What is that part of syntax, which teaches the coi - 
K 



110 REVIEW BY QUESTIONS. 

junctive cliaracters, or powers of individual words? (p. 
31.) 

2. Into how many parts is syncratology subdivided? (p. 
32.) 

3. What is epoage, what is sentcology, what is synclade- 
ology? (p. 32.) 

4. What is the order of a word? (p. 32.) 

5. How many orders are there? 

6. What is a corme? What is a elade? (p. 33.) 

Chapter II, Rank, and relation of Clades. (Page 33.) 

1. What does the rank of a clade, respect? (p. 33.) 

2. How many ranks are there? (p. 33.) 

3. What examples illustrate the rank of a clade? (p. 33, 
and 34.) 

4. What does the relation of a clade respect? (p. 34.) 

5. What does the unirelation respect? What does the 
plusrelation respect? (p. 34.) 

6. Upon what is word conjection founded? [p. 34.) 

7. Can you repeat all the epoagical rules? (p. 34.) 

8. Have you attended to the remarks under page 36? 

9. Have vou paid close attention to the note under page 
39? 

Part II, Senteolggy, Chapter I. (Page 41.) 

1. What is that part of syncratology, which respects the 
gnomodic, and the want of the gnomodic power, or charac- 
ter of the words in a gnomod, or sentence? (p. 41.) 

2. How are clades divided under senteology? (p. 41.) 

3. What is the gnomaclade, (or verb?) (p. 41.) 

4. What is the agnomoclade, (or nonverb?) (p. 42.) 

Chapter II, Division of the Cormes, or Nouns. (P. 42.) 

1. How are cormes divided under senteology? (p. 42.) 

2. What is the poecorme, (or nominative noun?) (p. 42.) 

3. What is the nepoecorrne, (or objective noun?) (/). 

42.). 

4 What is any clade which becomes a gnomod on be- 
ing conjected to the poecorme, /, thou, he, or we? (p. 42.) 

5. What is any clade which does not become a gnomod, 



REVIEW BY QUESTIONS. Ill 

or sentence on being conjected to the poecorme, /, thou, he, 
or we? (p. 42.) 

Part III, Synclabeology, Chapter I. (Page 44.) 

1. What is that part of syntax, which respects that classi- 
fication of the clades, which is founded upon their frame- 
work connection with other words? (p. 44.) 

2. How are gnomaclades [verbs) divided under synclade- 
ology? (p. 44.) 

ii. What is the poecorme gnomaclade? (p. 44.) (Intran- 
sitive verb.) 

4. What is the nepoecorme gnomaclade? (p. 45.) 

5. What is the dicormic gnomaclade? (p. 45.) (Tran- 
sitive verb.) 

Chapter II, Division of the Gnomaclades, 
(or nonverbs.) (P. 45.) 

1. How are the agnomaclades divided under synclade- 
ology? (p. 45.) 

2. What is -a steroelade, (preposition)? (p. 45) 

3,. What is a metaclade, (adjectives, articles, possessive 
nouns, and possessive pronouns)? (p. 45.) 

4. What is a monoclade, (conjunction)? (p. 45.) 

5. What is a clonoclade, (adverb)? (p. 46.) 

6. What does steroelade mean? This word is a con- 
traction of steronepoeclade, and means a clade confined to the 
nepoecorme in frame-work dependence. 

7. What does metaclade mean? This word is a con- 
traction of metacormeclade, and means a clade which may- 
be moved from one corme to the other. That is, from the 
poecorme to the nepoecorme; as, the man saw the knife. 

8. How many proving rules are there? (p. 46.) 

9. What is the first caution under rule 1? 
10- What is the second caution under rule I? 

11. What is the first caution under rule 2? (p. 47.) 

12. What is the second caution under rule 2? (p. 47.) 

13. What is the third caution under rule 2? (p. 47.) 

14. What is rule third? (p. 47.) 

15. What is rule fourth? (p. 48.) 
16- What is tensification? (p. 48.) 



112 REVIEW BY QUESTIONS. 

17. What is the first caution under rule fourth? (p. 48,) 

18. What caution is 2 under rule fourth? (p. 48.) 

19. How are the timedexes produced ? (p. 48.) 

20. What should the teacher impress upon the mind of 
his pupil? (;;. 48.) 

21. What is rule five? (p. 50.) 

22. By what name is that clade called in the old system, 
which is denominated a steroclade in the new? (p. 50.) 

23. By what name is that clade called in the old system, 
which in the new, is called a metaclade? (p. 50.) 

24. By what name is that clade called in the old system, 
which, in the new, is called a monoclade? [p. 50.) 

25. By what name is that clade called in the old system, 
which the new system denominates a clonoclade? (p. 50.) 

26. Have you attended critically to the caution under 
rule eighth? (p. 51.) 

27. Have you enabled yourselves to repeat all the prov- 
ing rules as presented under page 53? 

28. Have you examined the full specimen of proving by 
these rules? 

Are these rules applied to the words of the following 
sentence? 

[" The power (of speech is a faculty] ( , , 

peculiar) (to man,) (and , was bestowed (on him) 

(by his beneficent Creator) (for the greatest , ) (and 

, , , )( , , most excellent uses;) 

(but (alas) how often do we pervert it) (to the worst , 

) (of purposes.") 

29. What is the called in the new system? the in the 
new system is called a mctaclade; and in the old, the is 
called a definite article. The thing. Ride 6. 

30. What is power? power by the new system is a poe- 
corine, and by the old, it is called a nominative noun. 
Rule 1. 

31. What is is called? is by the new system is called a 
gnomaclade, and by the old it is called a verb. Rule 4. 

32. What is a called by the new system? a is deno- 
minated by the new system a metaclade, and by the old, 
an indefinite article. Rule G. 

33. What \s faculty? by the new, faculty is a nepoecorme, 
and by the old, it is a nominative noun, or a noun in the 
nominative cute. 



REVIEW BY QUESTIONS. 113 

Part IV, Chapter I, Semenolggy. (Page 55.) 

1 . What part of syntax is that which respects the power 
of a word to designate those things to which the dictionary 
meaning of the word does not apply? (p. 55.) 

2. How are cormes divided under semenology? (p. 
55.) 

3. How are generic cormes denned? (p. 55.) 

4. How are individual cormes denned? (p. 56.) 

5. What is a proxy corme? (p. 56.) 

6. What is a generic corme called in the old system? 
(p. 55.) 

7. What is an individual corme called in the old sys- 
tem? (p. 56.) 

8. What is a proxy corme called in the old system? (p. 
56.) (Appeal, Chapter XI, p. 193.) 

9. What is that in the following instance? [" Now 
we know that] (thou hast a devil.") By the new system 
that here, and in all similar cases, is a proxy corme, and by 
the old it is a conjunction! 

10. Can you repeat all the proxy cormes? (p. 57.) 

11. How are proxy cormes divided under semenology? 
(p. 57.) 

12. What is said of the exhibitive proxy cormes? (p. 
57.) 

13. Can you repeat all the exhibitive proxy cormes? 

14. The unexhibitive proxy cormes are what? (p. 58.) 

15. Will you repeat the unexhibitive proxy cormes? 

16. What is the poeic exhibitive proxy corme? (p. 58.) 

17. Will you repeat the poeic proxy cormes? 

18. The nepoeic exhibitive proxy corme is what? (p. 
58.) 

19. Can you repeat these cormes? 

Chapter II, Indication of Cormes. (Page 59.) 

1. The indication of a corme is what? (p. 59.) 

2. What are the indications? (p. 59.) 

3. Of what indications is the corme that indicates which 
person is constituted the former, or author of the sentence'? 
(p. 59.) 

4. Of what indication is the corme that indicates which 
person is constituted the auditor of the sentence? (p. 59.) 

k2 



114 REVIEW BY QUESTIONS. 

5. Of what indication is the corme which indicates 
which person, or which thing has no function either in 
forming the sentence, or in auditing it? (p. 59.) 

6. What is the formative indication called in the old 
system? The formative indication is called in the old sys- 
tem, first person: the auditive indication is called in the 
old, second person: and the sinefunctional is called in the 
old, third person. 

(For the unsoundness of the persons in the old system, 
see "The Appeal," Chapter XII, j). 197.) 

Chapter III, Numeration of Cormes. (Page 60.) 

1. What is the numeration of a corme? (p. 60.) 

2. How many numerations are there? (p. 60.) 

3. What is the singular? What is the plural? (/;. 60.) 

4. Upon what principle are cormes referred to different 
classes? (p. 60.) 

5. What are these classes called? (p. 60.) 

6. How many pluratories are there? (p. 60.) Repeat 
all the pluratories. 

7. What is the .V pluratory? (p. 60.) 

8. What is the Es pluratory? (/;. 62.) 

9. To what pluratory does mussulman belong? 

10. To what pluratory does memento belong? 

11. What is the Ves pluratory? (/;. 63.) 

12. What is the les pluratory? (/;. 64.) 

13. To what pluratory does beef belong? 

14. Can you tell the pluratory of each of the following 
cormes? 

Box, medium, wharf wife, ivolf grass, miss, ellipsis, 
attorney, lady, brief, hoof, money, thief, loaf, staff, 
shelf, beauty, penny, chimney, mono, solo, booby. 

15. What is the' E pluratory? (p. 04.) 

16. What is the En, or Ben pluratory? (/;. 64) 

17. What is the Ee pluratory? (p. 65.) 

18. W r hat is the Ice pluratory? (/;. 65.) 

19. What is the Im pluratory? (;;. 65.) 

20. What is said of cherub, and seraph/ (p. 65.) 

21. What is the se pluratory? [p. 65.) 

22. What is the /pluratory? (p. 65.) 



REVIEW BY QUESTIONS. 115 

23. Into what pluratory does genius fall when men of 
genius are meant? (p. 65.) 

24. To what pluratory is genius referred when aerial 
spirits are meant? (p. 65.) 

25. Is genius a duplus? (p. 65.) 

26. What is the A pluratory? (p. 66.) 

27. What is the nepos pluratory? (p. 66.) 

28. What does nepos mean? It means new word. New 
ivord pluratory. 

29. What is the sense pluratory? (p. 66.) 

30. Can you refer the following cormes to their respec- 
tive pluratories? 

Arcanum, none, medium, stamen, I, me, it, deer, sheep, 
genius, stratum, magus, lamina, magus, radius, cherub, 
goose, mouse, man, moon, booby, foot, brother, mother, 
child, I, thou, which, as, miss, wharf, loaf, it. 

(For more exercises, see p. 69.) 

31. What pluratory consists of the sin-e-sig-nums? (p. 
66.) 

32. Are there any cormes which we have no need to 
plaralize? (p. 66.) 

33. Are there any which are always plural? [p. 66.) 

34. Are there any which are used in both numerations 
without any form which is indicative of either the singular, 
or plural? 

35. Is alms a sinesignum, an everplus, or a sineplus? 

36. What is bread? What is riches? What is whom? 
W r hat is nothing? What is none? What is deer? What 
is pride? What is process? What is business? Process 
as well as business is a sineplus. Though we often see 
these cormes pluralized, they should never be so used. 
Businesses, Processes! 

Chafter IV. Gender. (P. 67.) 

1. The gender of a corme, or noun respects what? 
(;;. 67.) 

2. How many genders are there? (/;. 67.) 

3. What is the masculine, what is the feminine, what is 
the ambi, and what is the muo, or mute gender? (/?. 67.) 



116 REVIEW BY QUESTIONS. 

4. A genepos is what? A negenepos is what? A mal- 
cpos is what? A femepos is what? An ambigenepos is 
what? A mugenepos is what? A penepos is what? (;;. 68.) 

Chapter V, Division of the Agnomaclades. (P. 69.) 

1. A clinepos is what? A neclinepos is what? (/;. 69.) 

2. What is my — how declined, and for what? 

3. What is that — to what, and for what declined? 

4. What is much — how declined? 

5. Good is what? How is good declined? 

6. What is perfect? Why? Because it cannot be modi- 
fied in its sense by being varied in its form. 

Chapter VI, Subdivision of the Clinepoi. (P. 71.) 

1. How is the clinepos family divided under semenology? 

2. What is a comparative clinepos? What is a numeral 
clinepos? (p. 71.) 

3. What is good? What is his? What is high? 

Chapter VII, Indications of the Com. Clinepoi. 

(P. 72.) 

1. The indication of a comparative clinepos is what? 
(p. 72.) 

2. How many, and what are they? (p. 72.) 

3. What is the sub? What is the supersub? What is 
the super? (p. 72.) 

(1. Sub) positive degree of comparison in the old.) 
(2. Supersub, comparative degree of comparison.) 
(3. Super, superlative degree of comparison.) 

4. When the superior clade consists of more than one 
syllable, to what are the indications generally given? (p. 73.) 

5. Into what do clades of two syllables, ending in y, 
change y? (p. 73.) 

6. How do you form the supersub, and the super indi- 
cation of happy? 

7. When is y not changed into i? (p. 73.) 

8. How do you decline gay? Is it gay, gaier, gaiest — 
or gay, gayer, guy est? 

9. Why is not y exchanged for i in the declension 
oigay? (p. 73.) 



REVIEW BY QUESTIONS. 117 

10. Under what circumstances is the consonant doubled 
before er, and est? [p. 73.) 

11. Is big declined with a single, or double g? Which 
is right? — big, biger, bigest — or big, bigger, biggest? 

12. How do you decline upper? (p. 73.) 

13. Are there any properties whose nature is a preven- 
tive against their increase, and diminution? (;;. 73.) 

14. Have the clades which denote these any indication 
of comparison? (p. 73.) 

15. Has perfect, extreme, true, &c, any indication of 
comparison? 

Declension of the comparative clinepoi. 

1. The declensions of the comparative clinepoi, are 
what? (p. 73.) 

2. What is the general, and what is the special? (?;. 73.) 

3. Of what declension is good? 

4. Of what declension is high? 

5. Can you decline the following words? 

Good, bad, evil, ill, little, much, many, late, near, far. 
(See page 73.) 

Chapter VIII, Subdivision of the Neclinepoi. (P. 74.) 

1. Into what are neclinepoi divided? 

2. The relative neclinepos is one which can denote 
what? (p. 75.) 

3. The absolute neclinepos is one which denotes what? 
(/;. 75.) 

4. What is the, what is certain, what is perfect, and 
what is delightful? 

Chapter IX, The Timed-ex of a Gnomaclade, or verb. 
(P. 75.) 

1. The first gnomaclade, (or verb,) in a mono, has 
something about it which points to what? (p. 75.) 

2. What is this something called? (p. 75.) 

3. Sometimes the timedex is found in what? (p. 75.) 

4. Tense, and time are what? (/>. 70.) 

5. Both mean what? (/;. 76.) 



118 REVIEW BY QUESTIONS. 

6. Timedex is the means which enables a gnomaclade, 
or verb lo do what? (p. 76.) 

7. This means generally consist in a certain what? (/). 
76.) 

8. But it may consist in a new what? {p. 76.) 

9. And it may consist in an extra what? (p. 76.) 

10. What do will, and shall have in addition to their 
dictionary meaning? (p. 76.) 

11. There are two general timedexes which belong to 
what? (p. 76.) 

12. What may these be denominated for the purpose of 
general what? (;;. 76.) 

13. To what does art refer? To what does said refer? 
(p. 76.) 

14. The general timedex is that which does what? (/;. 
76.) 

15. What is the event timedex? [p. 77.) 

16. What is the speaking timedex called — and into how 
many timedexes is the event timedex divided? (/;. 77.) 

17. Can you give the names of the five timedexes into 
which the event timedex is subdivided? (/;. 77.) 

18. From what is phemic made, and what does it mean ? 
(p. 77.) 

19. What does pre mean? What does syn mean? What 
does di mean? What does post mean? (/;. 77.) 

20. What are the secondary elements? (/;. 78.) 

21. Which is the principal element? (p. 78.) 

22. What does "phemic" mean, what does "pre-phe- 
mic" mean, what does ll s?/;?-phemic" mean, what does 
" pre-syn-phemic" mean, what does " di-phemic" mean, 
what does " pre-di~phem\c" mean, what does " syn-di- 
phemic'' mean, what does "£>>-e-s?/>i-(/£-phemic" mean, 
what does " post-phemic" mean, and what does " pre-post- 
phemic" mean? (;;. 78.) 

23. Can you give the examples which arc employed un- 
der page 78 to illustrate the six timedexes? 

24. Have you read the note under page 79? 

25. What are the figures marked «, 6, c, </, r,/, g, h? 
(p. 81.) f 

26. W hat does the Band in timedex, S represent? (/;. 
79.) 

37. What are the events denominated? (/>. 79.) 



REVIEW BY QUESTIONS. 119 

28. What does figure S represent? (p. 80.) 

29. May speaking time ever be event time, and speaking 
time at the same time? (p. 80.) 

HO. Others are begun where, and finished where? [p. 
80.) 

31. Are any events begun, and finished in the speaking 
time? (p. 80.) 

32. Where is event a commenced? {p. 80.) 

33. What may be seen from the location of the events in 
the pictorial time of figure V? (p. 80.) 

34. What is the phemic timedex? (p. 82.) 

35. What is the presynphemic timedex? (p. 82.) 

36. The phemic timedex is either the primitive what? or 
it is what? (p. 82.) 

37. How is the presynphemic timedex formed? 

38. Can ?nay, must, could, should, ought, can, might, 
would, will, and have ever be phemic? (See timedex /, page 
83.) 

39. What is the general sign of the presynphemic? (See 
timedex m, page 83.) 

40. Can may, must, could, should, had, can, might, 
would, and did be prediphemic? (See timedex n, paore 
83.) 

41. Can was, were, did, and had ever be of the phemic? 
(See timedex /, page 83.) 

42. Can may, must, could, should, can, might, and 
would ever be of the presyndiphemic? (See timedex o, 
page 83.) 

43. What is the general sign of the presyndiphemic? 
(Timedex o, page 83.) 

44. Can should ever be of the pos/-phemic? (See time- 
dex p, page 83.) 

45. What gnomaclades, or verbs are generally of the posi- 
phemic? (See timedex p, page 83.) 

46. How many words does it take to form the prepost- 
phemic? Two. 

47. What are they? (See timedex q, page 83.) 

48. What should be remembered? (p. 84.) 

49. How is that modification which is the prediphemic 
timedex formed? (p. 84.) 



120 REVIEW BY QUESTIONS. 

Chapter X, Division of the Prediphemic Timedexes. 
(Regular, and Irregular Verbs.) 

1. What may the prediphemic timedexes be denomi- 
nated? (p. 91.) * 

2. What is the general prediphemic timedex? (p. 91.) 

3. The modifications which are produced by what, are 
what? (/;. 91.) 

4. What gnomaclade, or verb is called edable? (/;. 91.) 
(Regular.) 

5. What gnomaclade, or verb is called inedable? (p. 92.) 
(Irregular.) 

Chapter XI, Division of Gnomaclades with respect to 
their ability, or want of ability to point to time. 

.1. What may the forms of a gnomaclade, or verb be 
called with respect to their capacity, or want of their capa- 
city to point out time? (p. 93.) 

Note. The insertion of "perfect, and present participle" after the 
phrase, " The timedex forms," is an error. 

2. What do not the nontimedex forms do? (/;. 93.) 

3. How are the nontimedex forms produced? (;;. 93.) 

4. Are the nontimedex forms divided? (p. 93.) 

5. With respect to what are they divided? (;;. 93.) 

6. What are the nontimedex forms? (p. 93.) 

7. What is the radical nontimedex? (p. 93.) 

8. What is the prediradical nontimedex? (p. 93.) 

9. What is the radical nontimedex called in the old sys- 
tem? present (participle.) 

10. What is the prediradical nontimedex called in the 
old system? perfect participle. 

11. How is "prediradical" formed? (See note, page 
94.) 

12. What does the first column present? (;;. 94.) 

13. What does the second present? (p. 94.) 

14. What is the bcableform, w hat is the inbeable form — 
what is the havibleform; and wiiat is the inhavibfe form? 
(p. 95.) 






TRIFLECTION. 121 

CHAPTER XV. 

TRIFLECTION, (Conjugation.) 

Triflection is a full systematic presentation of the three 
kinds, or sets of gnomacladic inflections; namely, the poe- 
corme, the timedex, and the nontimedex inflections. 

Note. The poecorme inflections are s, es, th, t, and st. These are 
called poecorme inflections, not because they belong to the poecorme, 
but because they are controlled by the poecorme. 

The timedex inflections are those primitive, and deriva- 
tive forms of a gnomaclade, which indicate some distinct 
time: a, ed, u, t, Src. 

The nontimedex inflections are those derivative forms of 
a gnomaclade, which do not designate any particular time: 
en, ne, n, u, o, ing, fyc. 

TRIFLECTION OF be . 

SEMIMONO. 

Phemic Timedex: To be. Presyndiphemic Timedex: To have been. 

WHOLE MONO. 
Phemic: Be thou; be you; or be ye. 

PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 



SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

L Formative Indication, I am. 1. Form. Indication, We are. 

2. Auditive Indication, Thou art. 2. And. Indication, You are. 

3. Sinefunctional Ind. He is. 3. Sinef. Indication, They are. 

PRESYNPHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

SING. TLU. 

1. Form. Ind. I have been. 1. Form. Ind. We have been. 

2. Aud. Ind. Thou hast been. 2. Aud. Ind. Ye have been. 

3. Sinef. Ind. He Aas been. 3. Sinef. Ind. They have been. 



L 



122 TRIFLECTIOX. 



PREDIPHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

SJNG. rix\ 

1. Form. Ind. 1 was. 1. Form. Jnd. We were. 

2. Aud. Ind. Thou wast. 2. And. Jnd. You wire. 

3. Sinef. Ind. He was. 3. Sine/. Ind. They were. 

PRESYNDIPHEM1C TIMEDEX. 

SING. TLU. 

1. Form. Ind. I ^a<Z been. 1. Form. Ind. We had been, 

2. Awd. JnJ. Thou hadst been. 2. ^l«c/. Ind. You k(/ been. 

3. Sinef. Ind. She AatZ been. 3. Sinef. Ind. They /<«</ been. 

POSTPHEMIC TIMEDEX. 
SING. PUT. 

1. Form. Ind. I icill he. I. Form. Ind. We wi/i be. 

2. TlucZ. ina 7 . Thou rdZi be. 2. Aud. 7nd. Ye icili be. 

3. Sine/. /n<?. It will be. 3. Sine/". Ind. They tei/i be. 

SING. ThV. 

1. Form /»f/. I shall be. 1. Form. Ind. We shall be. 

2. Aua 7 . Ind. Thou sAafc be. 2. ^W. 2nd. Ye s/iaZZ be. 

3. Sinef. Ind. She sWZ be. 3. Siz/p/. 7nd. They shall bo, 

PRE-POSTPHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

SING. TLU. 

1. For. 7n. I shall have been. 1. For. In. Wc sAa/Z //are been. 

2. ylua 7 . 7h. Thou ici^ have been. 2. Aud. In. You shall have been. 

3. Sinef. In. She trill have been. 3. Sinef. In. They sAaZZ Aaue been. 

PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 

Nutative Cordiction. 

SING. PLU. 

1. For. 7ahZ. If I am. I. For. Ind. If we are. 

2. And. 7«d. If thou art. 2. ylurf. 7no\ If ye are. 

3. Sinef. Ind. If he is. 3. Sinef. Ind. If they are. 

It may be here asked, how is it known that the time is 
phemic? Answer: by the form of the gnomaclade, or verb. 
If it was postishemic, it would be, be; as, if I be. That is, 
if I shall be. But because it is am, art, is, and are, no 
word, denoting futurity, can be employed. 



TRIFLECTION. 123 

Prediphemic timedex of Be changed to the phemic by 
supposition, concession, <y-c. 

Negative Affirmative Cordiction. 

1. For. Ind. Was I well, we would attend. 

2. And. Ind, Wast thou a good writer, I would employ thee. 

3. Sinef. Ind. I wish he ivas here. 

SIXG. PLtT. 

- 1. For. Ind. If I was now there. I. For. Ind. If we were now, &e. 
2. And. Ind. Ifthou wast now, &c. 2. And. Ind. If ye were now, &e. 
8. Sinef . Ind. If she was now, &c. 3. Sinef. Ind. If they were now,&e. 

ELLIPTICAL POSTPHEM1C TIMEDEX. 

Nutative Cordiction. 

Where there are doubt, and futurity, shall, or should 
may be omitted: yet it is better to express it. 

PLC. 

1. For. Ind. whether we , be. 

2. Aud. Ind. unless ye , be. 

3. Sinef. Ind. lest they , be. 

This elliptical state of the sentence, however, produces 
no beauty, nor any other good: it is, therefore, better to 
give the full expression; as, If thou shouldst be at my 
house next week, thou wilt find me at home. 

1. Radical nontimedex: being. 

2. Prediradical nontimedex: been. 



DICORMIC POEIC GNOMACLADE. 

[Neuter verb, Passive verb.) 

The dicormic poeic gnomaclade is one which requires a 
poeic proxy corme for its nepoecorme instead of a nepoeic 
one; as, I am he, It is she, John is called he. (Not, am 
him, is her, is called him.) 

Note. Be through all its variations, and substitutes, and all other 
dicormic gnomucladcs which arc preceded by be, or by some of fee's 
forms, or substitutes, while they are in their primitive state, their predi- 



SING. 




1. For. Ind, If I 


, be. 


2. Aud. Lid. Ifthou 


, be. 


3. Sinef. Ind. If he 


, be. 



124 TRIFLECTION. 

phemic timcdcx form, or Ihcir prediradical nontimcdcx form, are poeic 
gnomaclades; as, Thou art he, Thou hast been called he. 
(Art is called the neuter verb, hast been called, the passive.) 

TRIFLECTION OF call. 

SEMIMONO. 

Dicormic Gnomaclade. 

Phemic Timedex. Presyndiphemic Timedex. 

To call me. To have called us. 

WHOLE MONO. 
Phemic: Call thou; call you; or call ye. 

PHEMIC TIMEDEX. 





SING. 






PLU. 


1. 


For. Ind. I call him. 


1. 


For. Ind. 


We call him, 


2. 


Aud. Ind. Thou callest him. 


2. 


Aud. Ind. 


You call him. 


3. 


Sinef. Ind. He calls him. 


3. 


Sine/. Ind. 


They call him. 



PRESYNPHEMIC TIMEDEX. 
SING. PLU. 

1. For. Ind. I have called them. 1. For. Ind. We have called her. 

2. Aud. Ind. Thou hast called them. 2. Aud. Ind. You have called her. 

3. Sin. Ind. He has called them. 3. Sin. Ind. They have called her. 

Dicormic Poeic Gnomaclade. 

sing. ruo. 

1. I have been called he. 1. We have been called they. 

2. Thou hast been called he. 2. You have been called they. 

3. He has been called he. 3. They have been raited they. 

Dicormic. 

SING. PLU. 

1. I have been calling him. 1. We have been calling them. 

2. Thou hast been calling him. 2. You have been calling them. 

3. He lias been calling him. 3. They have been calling them. 

PREDIl'HEMIC TIMEDEX. 

sing. n.r. 

1. For. Ind. I called thee. 1. For. Ind. We called thee. 

2. Aud. Ind. Thou callcdst him. 2. .-It///. /;?'/. Ye tailed thrc. 

3. Sinef. Ind. He called thec. 3. Sinef. Ind. They called thec. 



PRINCIPLES. 125 

1. Radical nontimedex: calling. 

2. Prediradical nontimedex: called. 

PRINCIPLES. 

PRINCILPE I. 

The sentence character is formed out of the first gnoma- 
clade in the series; as, [He should have been punished] 

(for his offence.) 

PRINCIPLE II. 

As that place which the first gnomaclade in the mono, 
occupies, is the place where the sentence character is 
formed by the poecorme, this place is denominated the 
formative position; as, " He has been seen to-day." 

PRINCIPLE III. 

The gnomaclade which occupies the second, or any 
place more remote from the poecorme, is in the exformative 
position; as, He h:>.s been seen to-day. 

PRINCIPLE IV. 

As the first gnomaclade is the only one that decides 
which of the six times is meant, none but the first is said 
to have a timedex; as, I shall have written, He is writing, 
He was writing, He will be writing. 

PRINCIPLE V. 

The first step in tensification gives the phemic timedex; 
as, is, was, been, Write, writes, writeth, tvritest, wrote, 
written. 

PRINCIPLE VI. 

The second step in tensification presents the prediphemic 
timedex; as, is, was, do, did, have, had, write, wrote. 

PRINCIPLE VII. 

The third step in tensification presents the prediradical 
nontimedex; as, write, wrote, written, Is, was, been, Fly, 
lie w, flown. 

PRINCIPLE VIII. 

When have, (has, hath, hast,) or will is the only gnoma- 
clade in the mono, the timedex is phemic; as, I have a 
book, "I will, — be thou clean." 
l2 



126 PRINCIPLES. 

PRINCIPLE IX. 

When have, (has, hath, hast,) is the first gnomaclade in 
the series, have has the presynphemic lirnedex; as, [" I 
have been informed] to-day that the president is among us." 
principle x. 

When have (has, hath, hast,) falls after may, must, 
might, could, ivould, or should, the time is partially fixed 
by the circumstances of the case; and it may be presyn- 
phemic, prediphemic, or presyndiphemic; as, I could have 
written this week, I could have written last week, I could 
have written before my brother returned. 

PRINCIPLE XI. 

When may, must, might, can, or should is not followed 
by have, the time is phemic; as, I may write, I must write, 
I might write, I can write. I should write. 

PRINCIPLE XII. 

The tense circumstances of the proposition, may vary 
ivould, and could from the phemic to the piediphemic 
time; as, I would return then in despite of all my friends 
rould say, I could write better then than I can now. 

PRINCIPLE XIII. 

JVill, and shall in a gnomaclade series, have the post- 
phemic timedex; as, I will call, I shall call, I will have that 
book. 

PRINCIPLE XIV. 

JVill, and shall have the prepostphemic timedex where 
have, with another gnomaclade follows; as, I shall have 
called before he leaves the city, He will have returned by 
six o'clock. 

PRINCIPLE XV. 

Had has the presyndiphemic timedex where it is followed 
by another gnomaclade; as, I had called before you left, 
Had you returned before I left, I should have seen you. 

PRINCIPLE XVI. 

Have, in the scmimono, has the presyndiphemic time- 
dex, where it is followed by another gnomaclade; as, I was 
very sorry last evening to have seen you at a public house 
the evening before. 



PRINCIPLES. 127 

PRINCIPLE XVII. 

As the general way of forming the prediphemic tiraedex, 
is the affixing of d, or ed to the phemic, the ed monogram 
is denominated the general, or common prediphemic time- 
dex; as, love, loved, walk, walked. 

PRINCIPLE XVIII. 

As the ed monogram is the common prediphemic time- 
dex, any other prediphemic timedex must be special; as, 
Do, did, Go, went, Pay, paid, Is, was, Fly, flew. 

PRINCIPLE XIX. 

As no gnomaciade in the series can have the common, 
the ed, prediphemic timedex, except the last, none but the 
last, can be edable; as, I have been punished. 

PRINCIPLE xx. 

All gnomaclades which do not form their prediphemic 
timedex by affixing d merely, or ed to the phemic, are de- 
nominated inedable gnomaclades; as, is, was, go, went, 
write, ivrote, fty,fleiv. 

PRINCIPLE XXI. 

As no gnomaciade but the last in the series, can make 
sense with the nepoecorme, none but the last can be di- 
cormic, or nepoecorme; as, " I have been writing a letter," 
" I will see you at one o'clock." 

Note. This principle may be given thus — all but the last must be 
poecorme; as, I have been writing a letter. 

Note. Where a gnomaciade is thrown from its affirmative position 
in the mono with a view to indicate tiie idea of granting, admitting, 
supposing, or conceding, the proposition is brought, by the nature of 
the case, into the phemic time in despite of the prediphemic timedex 
of the gnomaciade; as, Was I now at Boston, I could sec my friends, 
Were they here now, I could consult them, Had I the means now, I 
would return to England, Did he now write well, he could be em- 
ployed as clerk, If I was now at Boston, I could see my friends, If 
they were now here, I could consult them, If I had the means now, 
&c. 

In these cases the timedex, and the time itself differ. The clock is 
wrong. 



128 PASSIMATION. 



SPECIMEN OF PASSIMATION, OR PARSING. 

1. " John will have been punished.'''' 

John, an individual poecorme, sinefunctionai indication, singular 
numeration, s pluratory, and masculine gender. 

will, an inedable poecorme gnomaclade, formative position, prepost- 
phemic timedex, belonging to John. 

have, an inedable poecorme gnomaclade, exformative position, belong- 
ing tS John. 

been, an inedable poecorme gnomaclade, exformative position, belong- 
ing to John. 

punished, an edablc poecorme gnomaclade, exformative position be- 
longing to John. 

1. For the position of will see principle ii, page 125. 

2. For the position of have, been, and punished, see principle III, 
page 125. 

THE OLD SYSTEM APPLIED TO THE SAME SENTENCE. 

2. "John will have been punished." 

John, a nominative proper noun, third person, singular number, mas- 
culine gender. 

will have been punished, a regular passive verb, indicative mode, 
second future tense, third person, singular number, agreeing 
with its nominative, John. Rule 1. "The verb must agree 
with its nominative noun, or case in number, and j)erson" 

1. For the unsoundness of nominative noun, or case, see the Ap- 
peal, Chapter VII, page 141, and Chapter VIII, page 145. 

2. For the unsoundness of the old definition of a noun, see the 
Appeal, Chapter VI, page 133. 

3. For the unsoundness of the numbers, and persons, sec the Ap- 
peal, Chapter XII, page 197. 

4. For the unsoundness of the old system on the verb, sec the Ap- 
peal, Chapter XIII, page 206. 

5. For the unsoundness of the old system in the modes, see the 
Appeal, Chapter XV, page 242. 

6. For the unsoundness of the tenses in the old system, see the 
Appeal, Chapter XVI, page 255. 

7. For the number, and person of a verb, .see the Appeal, Chapter 
XIV, page 218. 

8. For the absurdity of Rule I, sec the Appeal, Chapter XIV, 
page 218. 

2. " I am called he." 
1, a poeic proxy poecorme, representing the name of the former of 
the sentence, formative indication, singular numeration, ncpos 
pluratory , and muo gender. 



FASSIMATION. 129 

am, an inedable poecormc gnomaclade, formative position, phemic 
timedex, belonging- to I. 

called, an edable dicormic poeic gnomaclade, exformative position, be- 
longing to 1, and he. 

he, a. poeic proxy nepoecurme, representing John, supposed, sinefunc- 
tional indieation, singular numeration, nepos pluratory, and mas- 
culine gender. 

1 . For poeic gnomaclade, see page 123. 

2. For nepos pluratory, see page 66. 

3. For poeic corme, see page 58. 

THE OLD SYSTEM APPLIED TO THE SAME WORDS. 

2. " I am catted he." 

I, a personal pronoun, first person, singular number, masculine gen- 
der, and in the nominative ease to am called. 

am called, a regular passive verb, indicative mode, present tense, first 
person, singular number, agreeing with its nominative 7. Rule 1. 

he, a personal pronoun, third person, singular number, masculine 
gender, and in the nominative case after am called! 

1. For the old system on the pronoun, see the Appeal, Chaptepv 
XI, page 193. 

2. For personal pronouns, &c, see the Appeal, Chapter XI, page 
194. 

3. For an exposure of the absurdity of putting he in the nominative 
case after am called, see the Appeal, page 175. 

3. [" I left ray trunk] (in Boston.") 

/ left my trunk. 

I, a poeic proxy poecorme, representing my name, formative indica- 
tion, singular numeration, nepos pluratory, and muo gender. 

left, an inedable dicormic gnomaclade, formative position, prediphe- 
mic timedex, belonging to I, and trunk. 

my, a mctacladc, belonging to trunk. 

trunk, a generic nepoccorme, sincfunctional indication, singular 
numeration, and s pluratory. (No gender.) 

" in Boston." 
in, a stcrocladc, belonging to Boston. 

Boston, an individual nepoccorme, sincfunctional indication, singular 
numeration, and s pluratory. 

THE OLD SYSTEM APPLIED TO THE SAME WORDS. 

3. " I left my trunk in Boston." 
I, a personal pronoun, first person, singular number, masculine gen- 
der, and in the nominative case to left. 



130 PASSIMATlON. 

left, an irregular transitive verb, indicative mode, imperfect tense, 
first person, singular number, agreeing with its nominative case, 
1". Rule 1. The verb, &c. 

my, a possessive pronominal adjective, or a possessive adjective pro- 
noun, or a pronoun in the possessive case, belonging to trunk. 

trunk, a common noun, third person, singular number, neuter gender, 
and in the objective case, governed by left. Rule. Transitive 
verbs govern nouns and pronouns in the the objective ease ! 

in, a prcpositiou, belonging to Boston, or governing Boston in the 
objective case. 

Boston, a proper noun, third person, singular number, neuter, or 
feminine gender, and in the objective case, governed by in. 
Rule. Prepositions govern nouns, and pronouns in the objective 
case. 

For remarks on the preposition, sec the Appeal, Chapter XIX, 
page 280. 

4. "7 saw John move the book. 11 

J, a poeic proxy poccorme, representing my name, formative indica- 
tion, singular numeration, nepos pluratory, and muo gentler. 

saw, an inedable dicormic gnomaclade, formative position, prediphe- 
mie timedex, belonging to 7, and John. 

John, an individual nepoecormc, sinefunctional indication, singular 
numeration, s pluratory, and masculine gender. 

to, (understood) is a clonoclade, belonging to more. 

move, an edable nepoecorme gnomaclade, exformative position, and 
phemic timedex, belonging to John, and book. 

the, a mclaclade, belonging to book. 

book, a generic nepoecorme, sinefunctional indication, singular nume- 
ration, and of the s pluratory. (No gender.) 



THE OLD SYSTEM APPLIED TO THE SAME WORDS. 

4. "I saw John move the book. 11 

1, a personal pronoun, first person, singular number, masculine gen- 
der, and in the nominative case to saw. 

saw, an irregular transitive verb, indicative mode, imperfect tense, 
first person, singular number, agreeing with its nominative /. 
Rule 1. 

John, a proper noun, third person, singular number, masculine gen- 
dcr, and in the objective case, governed by saw. Rii.k 11. 

to move, a regular transitive verb, infinitive mode, present tense, be- 
longing to John, and book. 

the, the definite article, belonging to hook. 

book, a common noun, third person, singular number, neuter znider, 
and in the objeelive ease, governed by to move. Rule U. 



FASSJMATION. 131 

1 . For the infinitive mood, see the Appeal, page 250. 

2. For a fall discussion of the article a, and the, sec the Appeal, 
Chapter V, page 119. 

5. {Ah!) (Jolm) [have you come again.] 
[Jiave you come again.'] 

have, an inedable poecorme gnomaclade, formative position, presyn- 
phemic timedex, belonging to you. 

you, an unexhibitive proxy corme, representing John, auditive indica- 
tion, plural numeration, nepos plurutory, and masculine gender. 

come, an inedable poecorme gnomaclade, exformative position, belong- 
ing to you. 

again, a clonoclade, belonging to come. 

{Mi) 

Ah, an individual nepoecorme, sinefunctional indication, singular nu- 
meration. (No pluratory.) 

(John,) 

John, an individual nepoecorme, auditive indication, singular numera- 
tion, s pluratory, masculine gender. 

THE OLD SYSTEM APPLIED TO THE SAME MONOS. 

(Ah!) (John) [have you come again?] 

Ah, an interjection. 

John, a proper noun, second person, singular number, masculine gen- 
der, and in the nominative case independent! 

have come, an irregular intransitive, or an irregular active intransitive, 
or an irregular neuter verb, indicative mode, perfect tense, second 
person, plural number, agreeing with its nominative case, you. 
Ruee 1. 

you, a personal pronoun, second person, plural number, masculine 
gender, and in the nominative case to the verb, have come. 

again, an adverb, belonging to have come. 

See the Appeal on the adverb Chapter XVIII, page 276. 

John, and James write. 
And, a conjunction, connecting John, and James! 
See the Appeal. Chapter XX, page 291. 

N. B. The construction should be, " John, and James writes. 



132 DIRECTIONS. 

This is seen from the fact that when the sentence is rendered ple- 
nary in its first form, it is not English: John write, and James write. 

See the Appeal page 237. 

DIRECTIONS. 

Passimate all the examples in each timedex concord- 
ance according to the above specimens. If the pupil should 
wish to make himself familiar with the old method of pars- 
ing, let him use the old names. 

Great care should be taken to divide every sentence of 
two, or more monos, into monos before passimation is 
commenced. The gnomecorme should be parsed first. 
The other monos should be taken in their printed order. 

The pupil should give his main attention to the cormes, 
and gnomaclades: it is not likely that enough has yet been 
said on the steroclade, the metaclade, the jnonocladc, and 
the clonoclade to enable all pupils to dispose of these 
parts with much accuracy: still, however, the pupil who 
can parse them with some degree of readiness, may be per- 
mitted to solve them without any injury to himself, or to 
the other members of his class. 

While in these Exercises, give undivided attention to 
the timedexes: examine all the technical terms through all 
the principles of their formation. Spare no pains in mak- 
ing the pupils familiar with all the rules, definitions, and 
principles which pertain to the cormes and the gnoma- 
clades. 

These Exercises commence under page 85, and con- 
tinue to page 90. 



SYNCLADEOLOGY RESUMED. 



133 



CHAPTER III. 

SYNCLADEOLOGY RESUMED. 

Subdivision of the Agnomaclades, or Noyiverbs into, Ste- 
roclades, or Prepositions, Metaclades, or Adjectives, 
Monoclades, or Conjunctions, and Clonoclades, or Ad- 
verbs. 

1. STEROCLADE. 

A steroclade, or preposition is an agnomaclade which 
is confined in its constructive dependence, to the nepoe- 
corme; as, He went to the fields zuith his axe in his hands. 

Note. Now, to is confined in its frame-work dependence, to Jielite; 
with to axe; and in to hands. These clades have no frame-work de- 
pendence upon he, the poecorme. A steroclade is a steronepoecorme 
clade. That is, a clade which is confined to the nepoecorme. 





STEROCLADES. 


PREPOSITIONS. 




Above, 


atwixt, 


excepting, 


to, 


about, 
across, 


before, 
behind, 


for, 
from, 


touching, 
toward, 


after, 


below, 


in, 


towards, 


against, 
amid, 


beneath, 
between, 


into, 
of, 


through, 
throughout, 


amidst, 


betwixt, 


off, 


under, 


among, 


beyond, 


on, 


underneath, 


amongst, 


but, 


over, 


unto, 


around, 


by, 


past, 


up, 


as, 
at, 
athwart, 


concerning, 

down, 

during. 


regarding, 
respecting, 
round, 


upon, 
with, 
within, 


atween, 


except, 


save, 


without. 



Note 1. Where any of these clades close agnomecorme, or a gnome- 
clad, they are clonoclades, or adverbs; as, He was spoken to, The 
books were called for. 

M 



134 STEROCLADE. 

Note. 2. To is a clonocladc when it stands before a gnomaclade; 
as, To walk, To read. It is the province of to in this place to prevent 
a command, or a petition. This may be seen from the fact that either a 
command, or a j^tition would be formed in the semimono was to not 
expressed, or understood before the gnomaclade; as, To go, to forgive 
our sins. 

By omitting to we have, in the first instance, a com- 
mand; as, go. 

And in the second, a petition, as, forgive our sins. 

In the British system of English Grammar, it is held 
that to is used as the sign of the infinitive mode! But he 
who will examine this subject, will see that to is not used 
as the mere sign of any mode, but solely to prevent a 
command, and a petition. The character of to as the 
first word in the semimono, is anti-imperative, and anti- 
petitionative. That is, against a command, and against 
a petition. 

2. " To" is understood in the semimono when the supe- 
rior part has, bid, dare, make, see, have, help, hear, feel, or 
let; as, bid him , go. 

Note. Some of the above clades become monoclades; as, for, at, 
&c. 

Others become rnetaclades, gnomaclades, and even cormes; as, 
round. 

I. Bound 
May be a corme: 

1. " The rounds of a ladder should be firm." 

2. ''This man purchased a round of beef." 

3. "They played a round apiece." 

4. " Each man knows the time in which he is to perform 
his round." 

5. " They fired a round apiece." 

II. Hound 
May be a gnomaclade: 

1. " The sun rounds the horizon." 

2. " Can you round the end more?" 



STEROCLADE. 135 

III. Round 
May be a melaclade: 

1. " A bottle may be round." 

2. " They set off upon a round trot." 

3. ** We will give you his answer in round numbers." 

4. " Make your letters round." 

IV. Round 
May be a clonoclade: 

1. "They compassed thee round." 

2. " I turned round to see who was behind me." 

3. " He has come round," (Changed sides.) 

Words are constantly changing their syncratological cha- 
racters; and to comprehend them in this change, requires 
ihat degree of acuteness which nothing but profound thought 
upon the subject of the great constructive principles of lan- 
guage, can give. 

•Around, about. 

1. A light shone around him. 

2. They went around ,,)(,,) (about 
the camp.) 

3. They rode around the country.. 

As, 

1. John came as a prophet. 

2. They came to me as pupils. 

3. He came as a witness, 

4. I shall use this stick as a pen. 

5. I address you as his friend. 

6. John went into the field as a soldier. 

7. I meet you as a friend. 

Notr. Where as introduces an agnomeclad to show the rank, call- 
ing, or character of him, or it mentioned in the gnomccormr, or gnome- 
clad to which this agnomeclad that as introduces, is conjectcd in 
•ense, it is a steroclade; as, [" I address you] (as his friend.") 

Here it is not the province of as to point out the manner of address- 



136 STEROCLADE. 

ing, but to show the character under which the person is addressed. 
[" I address you] (as his friend.") 

This form of expression does not decide whether the won], friend. 
is synonymous with J, or with you. If I am the friend, then the mo- 
no, as a friend, indicates under what character I address you. But, 
if you are meant by the word, /Wend, then, the mono, as a friend, in- 
dicates under what character you are addressed. [":I address you] 
(as his friend.* 1 ) 

N. B. Whenever the person, or thing - mentioned in the agnome- 
clad introduced by as, is one of the persons or things mentioned in 
the gnomecorme, or in the gnomeclad to which Ihe agnomeclad is 
conjected in sense, as is asteroclade; as, [" John came] (as a. prophet") 

Here John is the prophet — hence you may be certain that as in this 

case is a steroclade. But where the person or thing mentioned in the 

mono in which as is found, is not the person or thing mentioned in 

the superior mono, as is not a steroclade; as, [" Ye shall be] (as Gods 

, ) ( , knowing good) (and , , evil.") 

Here the beings mentioned in the gnomecorme are Adam and Eve 
— but those mentioned in the mono which as introduces are gods. 
And as the sense of the proposition is, not that they shall be gods, 
but that they shall resemble gods, you may be certain that as is not a 
steroclade. Besides, as, in the above instance, is in a gnomeclad — 
hence you may be certain that it is not a steroclade, for a steroclade 
must introduce an agnomeclad. 

Before. 

1. He stood before his desk. 

2. " The world was all before them." 

3. " Poverty is desirable before torments." 

4. He esteemed virtue before gold. 

5. " He that cometh after me, is preferred before me, for 
he was before me." 

Note. Tt may be well to say here that this verse is not English. 
After denotes time, and is not a stero, but a clono. The second before 
also means time — and is a clono — not a stero. The word, ?ne, should 
give place to I: 

[He (that cometh after) (I came,) is preferred] before 
me) — (for he was before (I teas.) 

REMARK. 

When before means phirr, preference^ <<r superiority, it m a stero- 
clade — in other instances, it is 



METACLADE. 137 

Behind, 

1. He rode behind me. 

2. He stands behind me. 

3. He left his family behind , 

4. He is behind his brother in Syntax. 

5. For I suppose I was not a whit behind the verychief- 
est apostles." 

6. " They cast thy laws behind their back." 

7. I know not what evidence is yet (behind , , ) 

8. Look (behind , .) 

9. " Forgetting those things which are (behind' 11 , .) 
10. There is a large amount (behind , , ) ( , 

» > » •) 
(Behind that sum) (tohich has been paid.) 

Below. 

1. " We are below the stars." 

2. This bill is below par. 

3. My brother is below , 



CHAPTER IV. 



II. METACLADF. 

A metaclade is an agnomaclade which is not confined to 
the poecorme, nor to the nepoecorme, but may be moved 
from one to the other; as, Ji man saw this young child. 
This young child saw a man. 

Note. In the first example, a is conjccted to the poecorme, man; 
and this, and young to the nepoecorme, child. But in the second, a 
is moved from the poecorme to the nepoecorme. And (Am, and young 
are moved from the nepoecorme to the poecorme (Meta, from one to 
another.) 

m2 



138 METACLADE 



CONCORDANCE. 



1. He saw no good fruit. 

2. This , is a very wise man. 

3. That lad is quite young. 

4. " A certain Centurion' 's servant." 

5. " A certain man planted a vine yard." 

6. That maris large vine-yard. 

7. " That thing that that man has said, is that thing 
that that man should not have said." 

8. This man is a would-be President. 

9. The above facts are obvious. 

10. And two she bears came, and devoured the children. 

11. Neither book is my soris , 

12. Either apple is goor/. 

13. ^o//i men are intoxicated. 

14. He is both intoxicated, and ???«<:/. 

15. " The before-mentioned facts are before you." 

16. Flying clouds are flying. 

17. Mr. Adams. 

18. Miss Brown. 

19. Laurine Brown was Jive months old on the 14th 
of April, 1837. 

20. Lord Byron. 

21. John Adams. 

22. J. Monroe. 

23. Genercd Jackson. 

24. General Jackson's administration was popular. 

25. What , shall we do? 

26. Which , of the two books is here? 

27. Some , of the apples are ripe. 

28. Your son may have either, of these two books. 

29. You may read that book — I will read this , 

30. These books are new — those , are old. 

31. This gentleman's argument is that , of sophistry. 

32. He is cunning. 

33. Such cunning is not wisdom. 

34. This child's ivisdom teeth. 

35. Which tooth did he pull? The one which gave him 
the tooth ache. 

36. One man came — the other remained. 

37. This boy's brother's son is ten years old. 



MONOCLADE. 139 

38. The first boy is taller than the second. 

39. But my dear sir, I do not much like these but pro- 
positions. 

40. Marble ware-house. 

41. Mine eyes are now dim. 

42. Yours , are bright. 

43. Theirs , are jet black. 

44. ./? semi-mono gnomaelade. 

45. Leather shoes are made of leather. 

46. Rail-road car house. 

47. Bail-road-car house. 

The comparative clinepoi are found among the r.xeta- 
clades, and the clonoclades. Hence some metaclades have 
the three indications— Sub, Super sub, and Super. 

There are some metaclades to which the sense itself de- 
nies the indications; as, straight. 

Metaclades are formed from other words by the follow- 
ing affixes: ic, al, an, ish, ful, ly, ing, id, en, ed, ty, iar, 
ous; as, virtue, virtuous, corme, corrmc, accident, accidenttt/, 
belove, belovea 7 , fly, Hying, &c. 



CHAPTER V. 

III. MONOCLADE. 



A monoclade is an agnomaclade which stands conjected 
to a mono; as, He returned; but (his brother remained.) 





MONOCLADES. CONJUNCTIONS. 


And 


further 


now 


although 


furthermore 


neither 


as 


hence 


or 


as-vvcll-as 


however 


otherwise 


again 


howsoever 


provided 


beside 


howbeit 


since 


besides 


if 


still 


being 


inasmuch 


than 


but 


lest 


then 



140 



1 


MONOCLADE. 




both 


likewise 


thence 


either 


moreover 


therefore 


except 


nay 


though 


excepting 


nathless 


unless 


else 


not-only 


whereas 


farther 


notwithstanding 


whether 


for 


no 
CONCORDANCE. 


yet 



As. 

1. " I can not aid him, as I have not the means." 

2. " Ye shall be as Gods , ." 

3. " He threw the ball as far (as we could see.") 

4. ("«#s it rains) [I can not go."] 

5. "Men are more happy as they are less involved in 
public concerns." (Bad.) 

6. "e#s , , with the people, so with the priest." 

7. " Jls your day is, so shall it be unto you." 

The last two examples are bad. They should read thus — 
As it is with the people, it is with the priest. 
As your day is, it shall be unto you. 

Fully corrected. 

1. [It is with the priest] (as it is) (with the people.) 

2. [Your strength shall be] (unto you) (as your day is.) 

8. "He is as good (as any man , .") 

As-well-as. 

1. He is willing (as-well as , , able.) 

2. [John , , ] (as-well-as I am ready.) 

Being. 

1. ("Being you have come,) [you may remain."] 

2. ["You may remain,] (being you have come,") 

3. ("Being you have written this copy well,) [I will 
set you another."] 

Note. This use of being is not elegant; yet it is common; and 
perhaps as just as many of those eccentricities in speech, which have 
the sanction of what is denominated good usage. 

These sentences, however, are presented in their implcnary state: 
hence it may be well to take another view of them. 



MOXOCLADE. 141 

1. ("Being that) (you have come,) [you may remain."] 

2. [" You may remain,] (being that) (you have come.")- 

3. ("Being that) (you have written this copy well) [I 
will set you another."] 

This shows that being is in truth a gnornaclade, instead of a 
monoclade. The mono, "being that" is a gnomeclad — and that is a 
proxy poecorme, representing - the mono, "you have come.'''' The fol- 
lowing mono in italics, is precisely like the mono, " being that.'" 

("He being ivise) [we gave heed] (to his counsel.") 

Both monos indicate the cause of an effect — hence they agree in 
sense. 

1. ("Being that) (you have come) [you may remain."] 

2. ("He being ivise) [we gave heed] (to his counsel.") 

What is the cause of this particular construction? In some instan- 
ces it is brevity. Be is thrown into its radical noniimedex form for 
the purpose of briefly expressing that causative idea for the expression 
of which because, or for must be employed in the absence of this non- 
timedex of be. 

2. ("Because he was wise) [we gave heed] (to his 
counsel." 

We see more brevity in, "He being wise," than in, 
" Because he was wise." 

It is likely that the radical nontimedex of be, was employed in the 
first place, to denote cause for mere brevity; but in the second, it is 
very likely that this nontimedex was employed not for brevity, but 
merely because it had acquired a causative import. In the following 
instance, this nontimedex does not promote brevity although it indi- 
cates cause. 

(" Being you have come,) [You may remain."] 
("Because you have come,) [you may remain."] 
(" As you have come,) [you may remain."] 
(" Since you have come,) [you may remain."] 

It may be well enough to say here that because is not a proper sub- 
stitute for being in all instances in which being is used to indicate 
cause. Being, in general, conveys an allusion to circumstances to 
which because does not point at all. Because is too absolute to supply 
the place of being. Being, in the following instance, implies that I 
do not want, or wish what I will 'permit; 



142 MONOCLADE. 

{"Being you have come,) [you may remain;"] 

And being conveys an allusion to the cause which induces me to 
permit what I do not want. But for gives no intimation to any one 
thing but the mere cause of the permission. 

But. 

1. I will call; but I can not stay but a few moments. 

[I will call;] (but I can not stay) ( , , , ) (but a few 
moments.) 

The second but is a steroclade — except a few moments. 

2. "John resides at York; but Thomas resides at 
Bristol." 

3. "It is written man shall not live Upon bread ( , 
, , alone;) but upon every word that proceed- 
ed out of the mouth of God." 

4. -"James is prudent; but His brother is not." 

5. ["He gave me but one cent:] ( , , , , 

Note. The mono to which but points is implied — 
Whereas I expected much more. 

6. ("If I could but return) [I should be happy:] ( , 

, , ■ , .") 

Note. The mono to which but points is implied in but, and is 
this— 

but I can not return. 

It may be well to give these examples in the form in which but id 
generally used: 

1. He gave me one cent — but I expected rive. 

2. If I could return I should be happy — but I can not 
return. 

But, as used in the fifth, and in the sixth example may, for mere ex- 
planation, be denominated an Exiled, or an Exile monocladc. It if 
sent away from its ovvn mono, by the peculiar construction of the 
sentence. 

An exile monoclade is one which is thrown from the 
mono to which it belongs in sense, and construction, into 
some foreign mono. Exile may be contracted to ex. 



MONOCLADE. 143 

The Ex-mono clade. 

Also, Both, But, Not-only. 

Both. 

1. [He is (both wise,] and , , good.) 

Both stands in the gnomecorme while it introduces the gnomeclad 
— " and he is good." 

Both is an ex-monoclade, belonging to its own mono from which it 
is exiled by the peculiar construction of the sentence. 

2. [" And both Jesus] and bis mother was there.") 

3. [" He is {both virtuous] and , , brave.") 

4. [" He is virtuous] (and , , brave) (both.) 

Note. Both in this position implies that a question has been put. 
("7s he virtuous?" (he is virtuous,) (and brave) both.) 
The mono to which both belongs is the question which it implies. 
Both may be a metaclade, and a clonoclade. 

1. Both mei were found. 

2. Both men's hats were found. 

Also. 

1. [He is right,] (and wrong) (also. 

Also is an ex-monoclade, belonging to the interrogative mono 
which it implies, and which is answered by the sentence, or by that 
clause of the sentence, in which also stands. 

" Is he right?" he is right, and wrong also. 

2. [I wrote a letter] (and he wrote one) (also. 

Note. The import of also is that more has been done than is con- 
templated in your question. Hence where nothing more has been 
done than is contemplated in the question, also should not be used. 

Do you sing, sir? I sing, and 1 play on the violin also. 

Do you sing, or play? 1 sing, and play both. " Indeed that is more 
than I had expected." 

"Indeed that is more than I had expected" isthc|mono, or monos 
to which both points. 

But. 
1. "He hath not grieved me but in part." 



144 MONOCLADE. 

2. " Could I but read my title clear." 

3. " There was but one man present." 

4. " He has paid but three dollars. 

5. " And but infirmity which waits upon worn times had 
something seized his wished ability, he himself the land, 
and waters measured." 

Now the mono to which but points is — 

But infirmity hath somewhat seized his wished ability. 

The idea will be better understood from constructing the sentence 
as follows: 

And had not infirmity which waits upon worn times, somewhat 
seized his wished ability, he himself would have measured the land, 
and waters. But (infirmity had siezed his wished ability,) (therefore 
he did not measure the land and water. 

6. "And but my noble Moor is true of mind, it were 
enough to put him to ill thinking." 

[And my noble Moor is true] (of mind,) (but it were enough to put 
him) (to ill thinking) (if it was not so.) 

7. " He has but one dollar left." 

He has but one dollar left — (notwithstanding he had a large amount 
(a few years) ago.) 

8. "His sand has nearly run — he has but one hour left." 

He has but one hour left (although he once had a long life) (before 
him.) 

Not-only. 

" Then Agrippa said unto Paul, Almost thou persuadest 
me to be a Christian." 

1. " [And Paul said] (I would (to God) that) {not-only 
(thou,) but also all (that hear me) (this day) were both 
almost,) (and altogether such) (as 1 am) (except these 
bonds.) 

These two words, not only, constitute but one part of speech. These 
two words taken conjunctively, or together, give notice of the intro- 
duction of the mono which begins with but. 



MONOCLADE. 145 

[And Paul said] (I would (to God) that) (not only (thou 

'",,)(,,,;) but , , also , 

) (all , , (that hear me) (this day) were both 

almost , ) ( , , , ) (and , , , ) 

( , , altogether such) (as I am) (except these 

bonds.) 

This sentence may be rendered plenary in the following manner: 

[And Paul said] (I would (to God) that) (not only (thou 
wast such a man) (as J am;) {but 1 would also that) (all 
the persons (that hear me) (on this day,) were both almost 
such a ?nan) (as I am) (and* / would that) (they were alto- 
gether such a man) fas I amj ^except these bonds. 

Not only, aho, and both are exiled monoclades. 

1. Not-only foretells the introduction of this mono (" but I would 
also that") 

2. Also gives notice of the introduction of this mono — (" all the per- 
sons were both almost such") 

3. Both gives notice of the introduction of this mono — (" and I 
would that") 

1. ["And Paul said] (I would (to God) that) not-only 
(thou , , , , ) ( , , , ) but 

, , also , ) all , , . (that hear 
me) ( , this day) were both almost, , , , ) 
( . , , ) (and ) ( , , 

altogether such , , ) (as I am) (except these 
bonds.") 

2. [He is (not-only willing,] but he is able to aid us.) 

3. [It not-only rained] (on that day,) but it snoived.) 

Either. 

1. (Either [John , , ] or his brother must go,) 
(or we can not get the papers.) 

Either is an ex-monoclade employed to give notice of the intended 
introduction of the mono — " or his brother ?nust go." 

* And should give place to but. 



146 MONOCLADE. 

2. (" Either [he , , , ]'• or 1 shall be there) 

(in season.' ") 

3. ("Either [negligence , , , , ] or < 
/i«s caused this injury™ 

4. (" Either [the charter must be forfeited] or //;e &<mJb 
wws£ redeem their notes." 

5. (" Either [monev , , ] or credit is necessary) 
(to all.") 

6. [" He went (either up,] or he went down™ 

OR, 

6. [" He went] (either (up //te country) or he went) 
(down the country.) 

Either may be a metacTade; as on either side, Either man. 
Either may be a clonocladc; as " Either man's hat." 

Except. 

). JNo man has a right to enter this park (except the city 
authority gives ( , him) leave.) 

2. No man can come unto me (except the Father draws 
him.") 

3. (" Except ye repent) [ye shall all likewise perish."""! 

Except, and excepting may be steroclade; as I would that all were 
such as I am except these bonds. 

Else. 

1. I must get his consent; else I can not go. 

2. "Thou desirest not sacrifice; else would I give it." 

3. " Repent, or else will I come to thee quickly. 

Or is redundant. 

1. Else may be a metaclade; as, What man else can be found, 
(other) Who else can be? What else will you have? 

2. Else may be a clonoclade; as, Where eZse can we go. 

For. 

1 At the commencement of a gnomecorme, and a gnome clad, for is 
a monoclade; as, 

1. [" For pay ye tribute also;] (for they are God's 

ministers." 



MONOCLADE. 147 

2. [" For rulers are not a terror] (to good works.") 

1. For is a steroclade at the commencement of an agnomeclad; as, 
[For, {for this cause,) pay yc tribute also,] I call {for the reading) (of 
the rule.) 

2. For is a clonoclade when it terminates a gnomeccrme, or a 
o-nomeclad; as, [The reading (of the bill (is called fer.] 

Farther, Further, Furthermore. 

Farther, further, and furthermore are monoclades where 
they are used in the sense of moreover, in which situation 
they generally, if not always, begin a sentence — they are 
sometimes preceded by and, and but. The remarks which 
have been made upon again, apply to farther, further, and 
furthermore. But, farther, he himself has admitted his 
guilt. That is, But / proceed farther to establish the 
truth of this charge from the admissions of the prisoner, 
for he himself has admitted his guilt. 

1. Farther, and further maybe ametaclade; as, Any 
farther illustration of farther, further, and furthermore, 
seems unnecessary, This measure will prevent all further 
proceedings in the ease. 

2. Farther, further, and furthermore, are generally clo- 
nocladcs; as, " He has gone farther into the subject than 
others," "To proceed further in this affair seems unim- 
portant to every one concerned," " And he said furthermore 
that he knew nothing of his own business." 

Hence, Thence. 

Hence, and thence are a monoclade where they are used 
in the sense of therefor ^ It rains — hence we can not return, 
God has given every man ability to do good in some way or 
other — thence no one can be idle with impunity. [There- 
fore we cannot return, Therefore no one can be idle with 
impunity.) 

1. Hence, and thence area clonoclade where they mean 
place; as, "Let us go hence.'''' "I will send thee far hence 
to the Gentiles," "Pie wishes to pay a year hence,'" " When 
you depart thence, shake oil' the dust of your feet." 

Note. From should never precede hence, thence, and tchencc. 



148 MONOCLADE. 

These words are synonymous with from — hence to use from with 
them, is to tautologise without any excuse: — 

"Then will I send, and fetch thee from thence, 1 ' is bad. Better — 
"Then will I send, and fetch thee hence." 

In construction "from thence" is a full mono, and should be dis- 
posed of as such. Hence thence becomes a ncpoecorme. 

However, Howsoever. 

However, and howsoever, are a monoclade where they 
are used in the sense of notwithstanding, nevertheless, yet, 
and but; as, I do not believe that it will rain to-day — how- 
ever it may rain within an hour. 

1. However, and howsoever is a clonoclade where they 
denote degree; as However hard this sentence may appear, 
it is just. 

Howbeit. 

Howbeit is always a monoclade, and is nearly synony- 
mous with, notwithstanding, nevertheless, yet, however, 
and but; as, " He ought to pay — howbeit he can not." 
(Yet he can not.) 

If, and Inasmuch. 
These words are always monoclades. 

Likewise. 

Likewise is a monoclade where it is used in the sense of 
also, too; as, "For he seeth that wise men die, likewise 
the fool, and the brutish persons perish, and leave their 
wealth to others." [Also the fool, &c.) 

Likewise is a clonoclade where it is not used in the sense of also; as 
" Go, and do likewise." (Go, and do as some other one who has been 

mentioned, has done.) 

Lest, and Moreover. 
These are generally, if not always monoclades. 



MONOCLADE. 149 



Nay. 



Nay is a monoclade where it is used in the sense of 
more; as, lie asked me for my purse— nay, he demanded 
it. 

1. Nay is a clonoclade where it has a negative import; 
as, " I tell you nay — but except ye repent ye shall all like- 
wise perish." 

2. Nay may be a corme; as, " His answer was nay" 
" He that will not when he may, when he would he shall 
have nay." 

Nat hies s. 

Nathless is always a monoclade, and is synonymous with 
nevertheless; as, He has never known fear, nathless he 
has been in great danger. 

Not-only. 

Not-only taken as one part of speech, is a monoclade 
where the idea expressed is that of something beyond, or 
above what is presumed, or expected; as, He is not-only 
virtuous, but he is brave. 

Notiv ith stan ding. 

Notwithstanding is always a monoclade, and implies a 
failure on the part of whatever exerts any influence to 
hinder, prevent, retard, or invert; as, "Notwithstanding 
much has been said to perplex, and confuse, this subject is 
perfectly clear." 

No. 

No is a monoclade where it is used in the sense of more; 
as, "No man — no, not with chains." (Nay.) 

1. No is a mctaclade; as, no man could bind — no, not with chains. 

2. No is a clonoclade; as, "No man's hands should be folded up in 
these days." 

3. No is a clonoclade in the following: Can I have your book, 
Charles? No. 

Rendered plenary: you can not have it. 

n2 



150 



MOXOCLADE. 



N. B. — Where no stands for the whole sentence, or answer, t is 
omitted, which should be supplied when the mono is rendered ple- 
nary. 

So IV. 

Now is a monoclade in all cases where it is not used in 
the sense of the mono, " at this time" or, " at that time, 99 

1. " Not this man, but Barabbas; now Barabbas was a 
robber." 

Here now has the sense of "you must know that" Barabbas was a 
robber. 

2. Now, how is any man to leain the will of his Maker, 
except from the Bible, and his conscience? 

Here wow seems to have the sense of "things being as they are" or, 
;t man being as he is y limited in intellect.'''' 

Man being as he is, " how is any man to learn the will 
of his Maker, except from the Bible, and his conscience?" 

3. "Now, if you will reform, John, all these things will 
soon be forgotten; and you will soon be restored to good 
standing among us." 

Now, here, has the sense of after all: 

After all, " if you will reform," &c. 

4. " Now, I know that the Lord will do me good, see- 
ing 1 have a Levite for my priest."' 

Noic, seems to indicate that the means by which Micah knows that 
the Lord would do him good, is some special event which has been 
mentioned, or which is to be mentioned in connection with this verse. 
Now is hero nearly synonymous with from this fact. 

From this fact, I know that the Lord will do me good: 
What fact? " / have a Levite for my priest." 

5. " Noiv , we know that thou hast a devil." (From 

this fact.) 






MONOCLADE. 151 

6. " Now, I beseech you, my dear brother to refrain 
from this vice." 

{In view of the dreadful consequences, I beseech you my dear bro- 
ther, to refrain from this vice.) 

Neither. 

1. [Neither [he , , , ] nor I was severe- 
ly punished." 

2. (" Neither [man , , ] nor woman was 
found) (in the whole land.") 

3. " Neither shall any man know him — nor shall any 
angel find him out." 

Note. Neither may be a metaclade; as, Neither book is new. 
Neither may be a clonoclade; as, " Neither man's book is here." 

Or. Otherwise. 

Or is always a monoclade. 

Otherwise is a monoclade where it implies an alterna- 
tive; as, "Man will be saved if he repents; otherwise, he 
will be lost forever," Man will repent if God gives him 
power — otherwise, he will remain in his sins, God will 
give man power to repent — otherwise the Bible is not true. 

Note. Otherwise is a clonoclade where it belongs to a gnoinacla.de; 
as, " He acted otherwise with me," To do otherwise would be to violate 
the law of duty, which no man should transgress. 

Provided. 

Provided is a monoclade where it is used in the sense of 
if; as, 1 will return provided he sends for me. 

Since. 

Since is a monoclade where it is used in the sense of 
for this reason; as, 

1. (" Since I can not return) [I must remain."] 

2. ["Man must die] (shice he is not immortal.") 

3. ["You should take your umbrella] (since it may 
rain.") 

4. " Since none (but a fool) can make a fire;) (and) 



152 MONOCLADE. 

(since John can make a fire,) [it follows that] (John is a 
fool.") 

[It follows that] (John is a fool) (since none (but a fool) can make 
a fire,) (and , , , ) ( , , , , ) (since 
John can make a fire.) 

Since is a clonoclade where it has any allusion to time. 

1. "It is seven years (since I left York.") 

2. "About six years (since I went) to London." 

3. [The Lord hath blessed me since] my coming , 

' *) 

4. Holy prophets (who have been since) (the world 

began.) 

5. [He has been ill ever since] (last November , 



Still. 

Still is a monoclade where it is used in the sense of 
nevertheless, or notwithstanding; as, 

1. ["He has been taught] — [still he is ignorant.") 

2. [He has possession still] — (still he has no right) (to 
the property.) 

3. [The call is still made;] (still men remain) (in theii 
sins.) 

Note. Still may be a metaclade, a clonoclade, and a gnomaclade. 

1. "A still small voice." 

2. [He holds possession still] — (still he has no right.) 

3. Can you not still this noise? 

1. "He is quite still about his troubles." (A metaclade.) 

2. "Children, be ye still immediately." ( \ metaclade.) 

3. "They sat perfectly still" (A clonoclade.) 

4. "The waters are still." (A metaclade.) 

1. "His pamphlet was still born." (A clonoclade.) 

2. "This is a stillborn pamphlet." (A clonoclade.) 

3. " Well, we are still here." (Vet.) Clo. 

4. " The rain still continues." (let.) Clo. 

5. "Let him proceed — that we may understand him still 
better. Clo. 



MONOCLADE. 153 

Than. Then. 

Than is always a monoclade, and indicates a compari- 
son of inequality; as, "a man is older than a child." 

Then is a monoclade where it is used in the sense of 
therefore, or "in that casef as, 

1. "It rains; then I can not go." 

2. "Men transgressed the law." "What, then, was to 
be done?" (What therefore was to be done?) 

3. "If all this is so, then man has a natural freedom." 

4. "Now t , then, be all thy weighty cares away." 

Note. Then may be a metaclade; as, The then proceedings. 
Then is generallj' a clonoclade, and denotes prediphemic time; as, 
" Then he came to me, and gave me the whole history of his parents.' 1 

1. "Till then who knew the force of those dire arms?" 

2. "And the Canaanite was then in the land." 

3. "First be reconciled to thy brother, and then come, 
and offer thy gift." 

4. "Now I know in part; but then shall I know even as 
I am known." 

Therefore, Though, Unless, Whereas, Whether. 
These words are monoclades in all cases. 

Yet. 

Yet is a monoclade where it is used much in the sense 
of but, nevertheless, notwithstanding, and indicates that 
the result is different from what might have been looked 
for; as, 

1. "He eats heartily; yet he has no strength." 

2. "He gives wise counsel to others; yet his own deeds 
are unwise acts." 

3. "They have promised; yet they do not perform." 

4. "They still hold possession; yet they have no right 
to the property." 

Note. Yet is a clonoclade where it alludes to time; as, We arc yd 
in Philadelphia, Arc you not up yet? 



154 CLONOCLADE. 



CHAPTER VI. 



IV. CLONOCLADE. 

A cloxoclade, or adverb, is an agnomaclade which 
stands conjected to another clade; as, He writes fast, She 
reads well, Very deep water. (Clono, a branch; hence, a 
clonoclade is a clade of a clade.) 

1. Clonoclade affix, ly. Clonoclade prefix, a. 

2. The clonoclade is never conjected to a sleroclade, nor 
to a mo no clade. The clonoclade may hold a frame-work 
connection with a gnomacladc, a melacfade, and with a 
clonoclade. 

COXCORDAXCE. 

1. " The more I read, the better I like the book." 

2. "A certain Centurion's servant was sick." 

3. "Peter's wife's mother lay sick." 

4. "The coat is a world too big." 

5. " To be good is to be happy." 

6. "He has been spoken to." 

7. "On a wall sixteen hands too high." 

8. " He rode with this boy's mother's father's son." 

9. He did not taste at ail. 

10. Open your hand wide, or shut it close. 

11. "No man's opinion is law with me." 

12. "The victory cost them dear." 

13. "The grass grows higher, and higher." 

14. "The fields look greener, and greener." 

15. "A crooked stick may appear straight." 

16. "A straight stick may look crooked." 

17. "The men marched straight up a steep ascent of 
steps, which were cut close, and deep into the rock." 

18. "The cakes taste short, and crisp." 

19. "The water runs clear." 

20. "The sun shone bright." 

21. "The grass grows straight, and grcui." 

22. "The trees look beaatiful" 

23. "The stick appears crooked — yet it is straight." 



CLONOCLADE. 155 

24. "The stick looks straight— but is crooked." 

25. "That lady looks beautiful." 

26. "This lady is certainly quite beautiful." 

27. "He counted his men exact." 

28. "The book was called for." 

29. "First, John will declaim — secondly, his brother — 
and thirdly, his teacher." 

30. [" After (six days , , ) there was a feast."] 

31. ["He had come before'] (I , .") 

32. ["He came after'] (I , .") 

33. "They rode for two days ( , , together") 

34. " This boy's brother's son is full ten years old." 

Full is a clono, and belongs, not to ten, but to is. Ten is a clono, 
and belongs to years. Years is a clono, and belongs to old. Old is 
a meta, belonging to son. 

35. "It is somewhat warm." 

36. " What with the bread, and what with the water, 
he sustained himself for several weeks." (Partly.) 

37. "The* sun shines every where." 

38. "Does he live any where in Pennsylvania?" 

Clonoclades, like other words, denote manner, jiositive- 
ness, negation, identity, conjunction, disjunction, cause, 
choice, similarity, dissimilarity, quantity, place, time, 
instrumentality, method, number, $*c. 

Manner— Correctly, softly, prudently, well, accordingly, 
badly, as, ill, side-wise, how, &c. 

Positiveness — Certainly, truly, undoubtedly, yes, verily, 
surely, indeed, positively, &c. 

Negation — No, not, nay, never, not at-all. 

Identity — Namely. 

Conjunction — Universally, together, generally, conjunc- 
tively. 

Disjunction — Off, separately, apart, asunder, singly, 
alone, apiece. 

Cause — Why, for, &c. 

Choice — Rather, sooner, chiefly, especially. 



156 CLONOCLADE. 

Similarity — So, as, equally, thus, like. 

Dissimilarity — Otherwise, else, different. 

Quantity — Almost, nearly, partially, partly, scarcely, 
hardly, sparingly, scantily, less, much, bountifully, libe- 
rally, &c. 

Place — Here, there, where, away, whereon, wherein, in, 
at, on, thither, whither, hitherward, whitherward, hence, 
thence, wherever, out, forth, forthwith, off, to, ahead, be- 
hind, to and/ro, every-where, any -where. 

Time — Now, when, then, whenever, after, as, afore, be- 
fore, yet, hereafter, already, hitherto, lastly, afterwards, 
never, ever, aforetime, about, straightly, immediately, soon, 
primarily, previously, at once, by and by. 

Instrumentality — Whereby, wherewith, thereby. 

Method — First, secondly, thirdly, &c. 

Number — Again, once, twice, &c. 

Probability — Perhaps, peradventure, likely, &c. 

Possibility — Possibly, &c. 

Necessity — Needs, necessarily, &c. 

Note. Some of the clonoclades have the indications; as, viore wise, 
most wise. 

Again. 

1. "For we know him that hath said, vengeance be- 
longeth unto me, and I will recompence, saith the Lord." 
And again, "The Lord shall judge his people." 

" And" is redundant. " Again" as here used, is nearly synony- 
mous with and. The first mono, (and) should be omitted. 

"Again" "The Lord shall judge his people." 

With respect to the word, again, it must be observed that strictly 
speaking, it can hardly be considered a mnnoclade. This word means 
repetition in some way or other. To understand this word as used in 
the following instance, it seems important to render the whole verse, 
or paragraph plenary: 

For we know him that hath said Vengeance belongcth unto me, I 
will recompence, saith the Lord. And again, " The Lord shall judge 
his people." 



CLONOCLADE. 157 

Rendered Plenary. 

And I will bring again the words of the Lord to show 
that he only, has the right to punish his people — " The 
Lord shall judge his people" 

Paul wished to establish the fact that vengeance belongs 
exclusively to God. To do this he brings in the first place, 
the following words: 

" Vengeance belongeth unto me" 

In the next place, he adduces the following: 

" / will recompence." 

Having twice drawn proof from the Lord himself to 
sustain the position that God only, has the right of punish- 
ing his people, Paul says, 

[And again I draw proof] (from the Lord) ( , , 

himself) ( , that) (the Lord alone has the right 

to punish his people:) " The Lord shall judge his people." 

In the case before us the word, again, is a clonoclade 
belonging to draw, bring, or present, understood. 

1. [And again , , , ] ( , , , 

)(...)(..)( . 

» » i ? ? i i » i ') 

(" The Lord shall judge his people." 

2. " For to which of the angels said he at any time, 
Thou art my son — this day have I begotten thee? [And 
again , , ] ( , , , ) ( , 

I ) ( J S > J ) ( J ) 1 

:) (I will be (to him) a father;) (and he shall be (to 
me) a son.") 

3. [" And again , , , ] ( , , 

i . )( ,,)(,., , 

) ( , , , :) (Let all the angels (of God) 

, worship him." 

N. B. In each of the ahove instances, the sentences may be ren- 
dered plenary by the following words: 

[/ bring scripture proof] (to establish this fact) 

Hence the ellipses may be filled with fewer words than arc indi- 
cated by the elliptical commas. 



These ellipses may be tilled in the following wav: 




158 CLONOCLADE. 

1. And I prove again this fact from the following scrip- 
ture: " Vengeance belongeth unto me." 

2. And I prove this fact again, from the following scrip- 
ture: "/ will be to him a father; and he shall be to me a 
son." 

3. And I prove again this fact from the following scrip- 
ture: "Let all the angels of God worship him." 

It may be well to show now the very monos which again seems to 
introduce in each of the three instances which are presented under 
this concordance. 

Again gives notice of the introduction of the mono which 
follows the hand: 

1. Again, |G° 3 (' t The Lord shall judge his people") 

2. Again, |CJ D3 (' t Thou art my son,) {this dai/) (have I 
begotten thee.") 

3. Again, %CJ^(" I ivill be (to him) a father,) (and he 
shall be (to me) a son") 

REMARK. 

Where the sentence is so implenary thattf^aitt seens to imply addi- 
tional matter rather than repetition of an act, it may be denominated 
a monoclade by all who are too lazy to render the sentence plenary. 



[John went~\; (but he did not remain.) 
[John ivent^ 

John, an individual poecorme, sinefunctional indication, singular 

numeration, s pluralory, and masculine gender. 
went, an inedable (because it does not form its prediphemic timedex 

with ed) poecorme gnomaclade, formative position, prediphemic 

timedex, belonging to John. 

(but he did not remain.) 

hut, a monoclade, belonging to its own mono which it subjoins to its 
superior mono: (John went.) 

he, an exhibitive proxy cormc, representing John, sinefunctional indi- 
cation, singular numeration, nepos pluratory, and masculine 
gender. 

did, an inedable poecorme gnomaclade, formative position, prediphe- 
mic timedex, belonging to he. 

not, a clonoclade, belonging to did. 



CLONOCLADE. 159 

remain, an edable poecorme gnomaclada, exforraative position, be- 
longing to he. 

The following Exercises should be passimated exactly 
according to this specimen. 

But, howbeit, though, although, however, howsoever, 
if, nevertheless, notwithstanding, nathless, yet, still. 

Note. The want of snceess in the attempt to take the life of the 
bird, suggests the general import of each of these words. 

EXERCISES. 

1. ["You have attempted to kill me] (with your arrow;) 
{but I am still flying.") 

2. ["You have thrown an instrument] (of death) (at 
me,) (howbeit, I am still alive.") (Howbeit is synonymous 
with nevertheless.) 

3. ["I am still alive] (though you have done your best 
, to kill me.") 

4. ["I am flying] (although you have attempted to stop 
me.") 

5. ["You have thrown your arrow] (at me,) (hovjever, 
I am not yet dead.") 

6. ["You seek my life;] (howsoever you can not take 
it.") 

7. [" You have not killed me] (if you have shot your 
arrow.") (If is here, although.) 

8. [" You wish to stop my flying;] (nevertheless, you 
have not succeeded.") 

9. ["I shall continue my flight] (notwithstanding your 
arrows , , ) ( , , .") 

10. ["Your arrow has pursued me to deprive me] (of 
life) (and (,,,,,,,,) 
( , wing,) (nathless, I still have both , .") 
Nathless is synonymous with notwithstanding. 

11. ["You wish to kill me;] (yet you can not , , 

12. ["It rains] (still there are no clouds.") 



160 CLONOCLADE. 

A Bb D E F* 
1. Behind, that, very fine tree. 



A Bb C Dd F 

1. Behind, that very fine tree. 
ABODE F 

2. In very much too cold weather. 
A Bb C Dd F 

3. In that, very new house. 
A Bb Cc Dd F 

4. In, that, very, new house. 
A B Cc E F 

5. Of coal black, broad cloth. 
A C Dd E F 

6. To that man's new hat. 

A B Cc D E F 

7. Into that man's quite new hat. 

ABC D E F 

8. With this boy's mother's father's son. 

A B Cc Dd E F 

9. With very old, pure, Holland Gin. 

A CDCD DEF 

10. With fiery red, East India, fine silk hats. 
A B Cc D E F 

11. For Mr. Cook's, very hard apples. 
A Bb F B C D E 

12. On a wall sixteen hands too high. 

A Bb B C D E F 

13. On, a, sixteen hands too high wall. 

For additional exercises, take page 25, 31, 35, 41, 43, 
(thus: correctly a clonoclade) and 72. 

* The letters over the words relate to the map; hut if there is no 
map in the school, no attention should be paid to the letters. 



EPOAGE, SENTEOLOGY, AND SYNCLADEOLOGY. 161 



CHAPTER I. 

EPOAGE, SENTEOLOGY, AND SYNCLADEOLOGY RE- 
SUMED. 

TRANSVERBATION. 

Transverbation is constructed from trans, from one 
place to another, and verbum, a word, and means the act, 
process, or science of removing the same word from one 
class, or verbatory to another. 

The principles of transverbation, are the following: 

1. The nature of the word; as, virtue, writes, free. 

2. The application of the word in forming a mono; as, 
This is the book that I saw, Of has two letters. 

3. Pronunciation, or accent; as, reb-el, re-bel. 

4. Change in form; as, mode, modal. 

CORMIFICATION. 

Uormification is the process of rendering words cormes. 

1. To cormify is to present a word which may be both a clade, and 
a corme, in its cormos character; as, love. 

This word may be cormified in two ways: first, it may be thrown 
into a cormos form which excludes the possibility of a dados charac- 
ter; as, loveliness. 

Secondly, it may be cormified by being- foundationally applied in a 
mono; as, '■'■Love is a distinguishing- attribute of a Christian." 

2. To cladeify is to present a word which may be both a corme, and 
a clade, in its clados character; as, love. 

This word may be cladeified in two ways — first, it may be cladeified 
by being put into a decidedly cladeic form; as, lovest, loveth, loves, &c. 

Secondly, it may be cladeified by being unfonndationally used in a 
mono; as, " All real Christians love each other," To love. 

Words are cormified by the four followimg means: 

1. By the nature of the word; as, Moses, rock. 

2. By application; as, [All (that relates) to man) is matter] of pro- 
gression, Moses Brown, rock salt. 

3. By accent, pronunciation; as, re6-el, con-vict. 

4. By some new form; as, dote, dotage, free, freedom. 

o2 



162 



CORMIFICATION. 



I. Many gnomaclades, or verbs are cormified by the fol- 
lowing cormifiers. 



macladeic Cormijiers. Gnomocladcs. 


Cormes. 


age 


dote, 


doiage. 


a nee 


repent, 


repentance. 


ancy 


occupy, 


occu pane?/. 


ence 


depend, 


dependence. 


ency 


depend, 


dependency. 


ant 


defend, 


defendant. 


ent 


preside, 


president. 


ment 


manage, 


management. 


ure 


expose, 


exposure. 


ation 


simplify, 


simplified/ion. 


ion 


depress, 


depression. 


ition 


add, 


addition. 


sion 


admit, 


admission. 


Hon 


produce, 


production. 


er 


make, 


maker. 


or 


create, 


creator. 


ce 


defend, 


defence. 


se 


expend, 


expense. 


ship 


court, 


courtship. 


ing 


begin, 


beginning-. 


red 


hate, 


hatred. 


ture 


mix, 


mixture. 


th 


grow, 


growth. 


ist 


copy, 


copyist. 



II. Some gnomaclades are cormified by pronunciation 
merely; as, con-vie/, con-vict, re-bel, reb-e\. 

III. Many metaclades are cormified by incorporating 
some of the following metacladeic cormijiers with the 
metaclades. 



Metacladeic Cormifiers. 


Metaclades. 


Cormes. 


dom 


free, 


freedom. 


hood 


false, 


falsehood. 


ness 


good, 


goodness. 


toy ... 


real, 


reality. 
hardship. 


ship 


hard, 


ce ... 


fragrant, 


fragrance. 


cy 


- v llucnt, 


llucncy. 


t ... 


- high, 


height. 


th ... 


strong, 


sin ii u///. 


aid 


drunk, 


drunkan/. 


ist 


universal, 


universalis/. 



CORMOS MODIFICATION". 



163 



CORMOS MODIFICATION. 

Cormos Modification is a change which is produced in 
the sense by giving the corrae a new cormos form; as, 
patron, patronage. 

Cormos Modifiers. 



ate 

do in 

head 

hood 

rick 

ship 

xcick 



V 

cry 

el 

erel 

kin 

let 

ling 

ock 

ist 

holi 

fore 

man 

states 

trades 



Examples 


of Illustration. 


lemon, 


lemonade. 


parent, 


parentage. 


tetrarch, 


tetrarchcrte. 


king, 


kingdom. 


God, 


Godhead. 


priest, 


priesthood. 


bishop, 


bishopricA". 


friend, 


friends/a'/?. 


bail, 


bailiwick . 


music, 


musician. 


cutler, 


cutlery. 


smith, 


smithery. 


cock, 


cockerel!. 


lamb, 


lambkin. 


river, 


rivulet. 


duck, 


dncklinir. 


hill, 


hillock. 


machine, 


machinist. 


day, 


holiday. 


runner, 


forerunner. 


slaughter, 


7/ianslaughter. 


man, 


states man. 


man, 


tradesman. 



The following cormos modifiers are incorporated with 
cormes to throw them from the person, to something which 
pertains to him: age, ate, dize, dom, hood, rick, ry, ship, 
wick, y. Patron patronage, Tetrarch tetrarcha.'e, Merchant 
merchandize, King kingdom, Priest, priesthood, Bishop 
bishopric/;, Smith smithen/, Slave slavery, Steward stew- 
ards////;, Bailiff bailiwick, Cutler cutlery, Grocer grocery. 

The following cormos modifiers are generally incorpo- 
rated with cormes — some, however, may be affixed to chides. 
But whether affixed to eludes, or to cormes they are em- 
ployed to change the application of the word from the 
thing which pertains to the person, to the person himself: 
ard, ee, er, ion, ist, or, man. Drunk drunkard, Drunken- 



164 GNOMACLADETFICATION. 

ness drunkard, Bail bailee, Teach teacher, Physic phy- 
sician, Botany bolaiusl, Act actor, Create creator, Trade 
tradesman. 



CHAPTER II. 



GNOMACLADEIFICATION. 

Gnomacadetfication is the process of rendering words 
gnomaclades. 

Words are gnomacladed in four ways : 

1. By the nature of the word, as, am, is, written, go. 

2. By pronunciation, or accent; as, re-bel, con-vict. 

3. By application; as, " These fires dry the ground quite fast." 

4. By some change in form; as, origin, originate, bath, bathe, grass, 
graze. 

I. Some cormes are gnomacladed by incorporating the 
following gnomacladeifiers: 



Connie Gnomacladeifiers. 


Cormes. 


Gnomaclades. 


ate ... 
en ... 

fy --- 

s ... 


- origin, 

- height, 

- beauty, 

- love, 


originate. 
heighten, 
beauti/y. 
loves . 


es ... 
th ... 
ize ... 


- beauty, 

- gift, 

- method, 


beautifies. 
giveM . 
methodize. 


e ... 


- bath, 


bathe. 


s ... 


- device, 


devise. 


ze ... 


- grass, 


graze. 


en ... 
in ... 


- rage, 

- form, 


enrage, 
inform. 



II. Some metaclades are gnomacladed by incorporating 
the following gnomacladeifiers: 

Metacladeie Gnomacladeifiers . Metaclades. Gnomaclades. 

ate .... domestic, domesticate, 

en .... light. lighten. 

ize .... moral, moralize. 



GNOMACLADEIFICATION. 165 

III. Some metaclades are gnomacladed by application, 
without any change of form; as, 

1. " Wet cloth. They wet the cloth." 

2. " Dry cloth. They dry the cloth." 

Note. It may be well to say here that these metaclades may take 
the s, es, th, t, and st gnomacladeifiers; as, He warms himself. 

IV. Some clonoclades are gnomacladed by application, 
without any change of form; as, 

1. " He went forward. They forward goods." 

2. " Take offyowv hat. Q^with his head." 

3. " Get up. Up, let us be off." 

V. Some words are gnomacladed by incorporating the 
following prefix gnomacladeifieis: 

Gnomacladeifiers. Examples of Illustration, 

en .... dear, endear. 

in .... form, inform. 

trans .... late, translate. 

re .... mind, remind. 

GNOMACLADEIC MODIFICATION'S. 

Gnomacladeic modification is a change which is pro- 
duced in the sense of the gnomaclades by incorporating 
the following monograms with gnomaclades themselves: 

Gnomacladeic Modifiers. Examples of Illustration, 

a .... vow, avow. 



be 


- spread, 


bespread. 


dis 


- like, 


dislike. 


for 


- bear, 


forbear. 


fore 


- tell, 


foretcW. 


mis 


- give, _ 


misgive. 


over 


- see, 


ovfrscc. 


out 


- live, 


out live. 


un 


, do, 


undo. 


under - 


• went, 


underwent 


up 


- set, 


upset 


with 


- stand, 


iriMstand. 


&c. 







166 



METACLADEIFICATION. 



CHAPTER III. 
STEROCLADEIFICATION. 

Sterocladeification is the act, or the principle of 
rendering words steroclades, or prepositions. 

Words are sterocladed in two ways: 

1. By the nature of the word; as, of, to, in, on. 

2. By application in forming a mono; as, All went but him, all 
went past the house, all came except, or save John. 



CHAPTER IV. 



METACLADEIFICATION. 

Metacladeification is the act, or process of forming 
metaclades. 

Words are metacladed in three ways: 

1. By the nature of the word; as, free, high, black, red. 

2. By application; as, Salt water, Moses Brown, table spoons, fly- 
ing clouds, rail roads. 

3. By a change in the form of the word; as, mode, modaZ, irony, 
ironical. 

I. Some cormes are metacladed by incorporating the fol- 
lowing cormic metacladeifiers: 



Cormic Metacladeifiers. 


Coitnes. 


Metaclades. 


al 


mode, 


modal. 


ical ... 


irony, 


ironical. 


ine ... 


adamant, 


adamantt/Nr. 


ous 


mountain, 


mountainous. 


eous 


- right, 


righlcou*. 


ious ... 


space, 


spacious. 


V ■ : : : 


- bone, 


bony. 


man, 


man/y. 


ish 


slave, 


slavish. 


ful • - . 


. skill, 


skillful. 



M0N0CLADEIF1CATI0N. 



167 



Cormic Metacladeijiers. 
ic 
He 
able 
ible 



ed 
some 

ese 



y, ine 
o, rs 



Cormes. 


Melaclades. 


hero, 


heroic. 


infant, 


infantiZe. 


reason, 


reasonaoZe, 


convert, 


convertioZe. 


Rome, 


Roman. 


brass, 


brazen. 


saint, 


sainted. 


burden, 


burdensowie. 


Portugal, 
sun, 


Portuguese. 
sunZess. 


lady, 
ladies, 


lady's, 
ladies'. 


tne, my, mine, 


thou, thy, thine. 


us, our, ours. 




you, your, yours, 
he, his. 


her, hers, it, its. 


they, their, theirs. 


who, whose. 





II. Some cormes are metacladed by dropping the cormi- 
fying monogram; as, Goodness, good, Bad?iess, bad, 
Blackness, black. 



METACLADEIC MODIFICATION. 

Metacladeic modification is a change produced in the 
meaning of the word by incorporating some additional 
monogram. 



Metacladeic Modifiers, 
ish 



&c. 



Examples of Illustration. 
red, redisA. 

honorable, dishonorable, 

sentensic, insentensic. 

deniable, wndeniable. 

poeic, nepoeic. 



CHAPTER V. 

MONOCLADEIFICATION. 

Monocladeification is the act, or principle of rendering 
words monocladcs, or conjunctions. 



168 CLONOCLADEIFICATION. 

Words are monocladed in two ways: 

1. By the nature of the word; as, because, notwithstanding, there- 
fore, than, nathless, and, or. 

2. By application of a word to a mono; as, I can not return except 
he sends for me, I shall go provided it does not rain, It is a fine day: 
hence we must go to town. 



CHAPTER VI. 

CLONOCLADEIFICATION. 

Clonocladeification is the process of rendering words 
clonoclades, or adverbs. 

Words are clonocladed in three ways: 

1. By the nature of the word; as, too, indeed. 

2. By the application of the word in forming a mono; as, The coat 
is a world too big, John's brother's son is ten years old, lie is spoken 
of. 

3. By some change in the form of the word; as, accurate, accu- 
rate/y, just, jusl/y, way, away, head, ahead. 

I. Some metaelades are clonocladed by incorporating ly; 

as, 

Metaclade Clonocladeijiers. Examples of Illustration, 

ly .... virtuous, virtuous/y. 

ly .... brave, bravc/y. 

ly .... second, second/y. 

II. Some cormes, some gnomaclades, and some meta- 
elades, are clonocladed by incorporating a as a prefix; as, 

Clonocladeijiers. Examples of Illustration. 

Connie a ly side, aside, man, man///. 

Gnomacladeic a go, ago, miss, amiss. 

Metacladeic a right, aright, wry, awry. 

III. Many worths arc clonocladed by their original na- 
ture; as, too, here, there, where, &c. 

These are never removed from the clonorelatory, their 
native place, except when they are spoken of, when they 
are thrown into the cormitory; as, too is a clonoclade. 



THE EFOSUARY. 169 



CHAPTER VII. 



THE EPOSUARY. 



The Eposuary is a map, containing a series of compart^ 
ments for the reception of words upon the principle of the 
syntax analogy between the words of a sentence, and the 
hieroglyphics of these compartments. 

A VERBATORY. 

A verbatory is that compartment to which a word is 
referred in consequence of the syntax analogy between the 
word of the sentence, and the hieroglyphic of the compart- 
ment. 

REMARKS. 

Two of the verbatories are founded upon Epoagical principles. 
(See page 32, Chapter, I.) These two verbatories respect the 
epoagical standing of the words of a mono. One of these two verba- 
tories, is called cormitory; the other is denominated, cladeitory. 
These two verbatories are subdivided upon senteological principles: 
hence the cormitory is subdivided into a poecorme cormitory, and a 
nepoecornie cormitory. And the claditory is subdivided into a 
gnomaclade cladeitory, and an agnomaclade cladeitory. (See page 
41, Chapter I, and, page 42, Chapter II.) 

One of these two verbatories is still farther divided, for semenology 
divides the cormitory into a generic cormitory, an individual cormi- 
tory, and into a proxy cormitory. (Page 55, Chapter I.) And 
semenology makes several other verbatories which are presented on 
the eposuary, one after another, under the head of Cormos Verba- 
tories. 

Senteology divides the cladeitory into two verbatories: one of 
which is the gnomaclade cladeitory; and the other is the agnomaclade 
cladeitory. And semenology institutes two new verbatories: one of 
which is denominated, prediphemitory which is subdivided by scntf. 
nology itself into edable, inedablc, and ambi. The other is timea- 
tory, which is subdivided by semenology itself into phemic, presyn- 
phemic, prcdip/iemic, presi/ndipficmic, postphemic, and prepestphemic. 
In addition to these, syncladeolo<ry institutes a distinct verbatory 
which is called relatory, and this is divided by syndadeologyf it>( : 
into poecorme relator y, nepoecorme relator y, and dicormic rkla. 
tory. These several verbatories are presented on the ErosrAK 
under the head of Gnomaclade Varbatories. 
P 



170 VERBATORIES. 

Syncladeology, and semenology have instituted their respective vcr- 
batories. The relatoky which is subdivided into stero, meta, mono, 
and clono, is instituted by syncladeology. The clinitory which is 
subdivided into comparative and numeral; and the necltnitory which 
is subdivided into relative and absolute; and the indicatory which is 
subdivided into formative, auditive, and sinefunctional; and the numi- 
tory which is subdivided into singular and plural; and the plura- 
tory which is subdivided into S, Es, Ves, Ies, E, En, Ee, Ic, Ice, Im, 
JE, I, A, Nepos, and Sense; and the gemtory which is subdivided 
into masculine, feminine, ambi, and ?nuo; and the indicatory which 
is subdivided into sub, supersub, and super, are all instituted by 
Semenology. 

CORMOS VERBATORIES. 

1. A cormitory, 2. An exhibitory, 3. An indicatory, 
4. A numitory, 5. A pluratory, 6. A genitory. 

1. A cormitory is a verbatory which is characterized by 
the cormes of the demonstrator. 

2. An exhibitory is a cormos verbatory to which those 
proxy cormes are referred which exhibit in their form their 
poeic, or their nepoic character. (See page 58.) 

3. An indicatory is a cormos verbatory to which cormes 
are referred by virtue of their capacity to indicate the 

functional relations which the things introduced into a 
sentence bear to the sentence. 

4. A numitory is a cormos verbatory to which cormes 
are referred by reason of their numeration capacity. 

5. A pluratory is a cormos verbatory to which cormes 
are referred by reason of the manner, or means of forming 
their plural numeration, or number. 

6. A genitory is a cormos verbatory to which cormes 
are referred by reason of their genders. 

directions. 

1. Give undivided attention to the demonstrator: read 
every word which relates to it with care. 

2. Examine the specimen of passimation, which is pre- 
sented near the demonstratory. 

3. Give close attention to the eposuary on which is 
passimated the following sentence: 

[" Moses then smote the hard rock~] (with his most 
sacred rod") 



PASSIMATION. 171 

Find the various verbatories to which the word, Moses, 
is referred. Next, find all the verbatories to which then is 
referred, and so on with smote, &c. 

4. If the word is a corme, it is passi mated on the first 
series, the cormic series of verbatories. 

5. If the word is a gnomaclade, it is passimated on the 
second, the gnomaclade series of verbatories. 

6. If the word is an agnomaclade, it is passimated on 
the third, the agnomaclade series of verbatories. Before 
you attempt, then, to passimate a word, settle in your mind 
whether the word is a corme, or a clade: and, if a clade, 
ascertain whether it is a gnomaclade, or an agnomaclade. 

The following specimen of passimation, contains instan- 
ces in which whole monos, and semimonos become cormes. 
And by giving proper attention to the manner in which 
these cases are disposed of, you will make yourselves mas- 
ters of all similar instances. 

Lastly, make yourselves familiar with the different con- 
cordances: from these you may derive great aid. They 
are a substitute for the living teacher; and they will give you 
nearly as much help as he could if you consult them as 
you ought. 

PASSIMATION, OR PARSING. 

1. [His disciples said, {who, then, can be saved)?^\ 

His, a word of the agnomaclade cladeitory, meta relatory, metacladed 
by is (he, his) numeral clinatory, si nefu actional indicatory, 
singular numitory, nepos pluratory, masculine genitory, be- 
longing to disciple. 

disciples, a word of the generic poecorme cormitory, cormified by its 
nature, sinefu actional indicatory, s pluratory, and masculine 
genitory. (This word may be of the ambi gender.) 

said, a word of the gnomaclade cladeitory, gnomacladed by its nature, 
inedable prediphemitory, dicormic relatory, formative pository, 
prediphemic timcatory, belonging to disciples, and to the cor- 
mic mono, who, then, can be saved? 

who, then, can be saved, a mono of the individual nepoecorme cormi- 
tory, cormified by its application, sinefunctional indicatory, 
singular numitory. (No pluratory; no genitory.) 

(" Who, then, can be saved?") 

Who, a word of the proxy poecorme cormitory, cormified by its nature, 



172 PASSIMATION. 

representing the phrase '' what persons" poeic exhibitor/, 
sinefunctiunal indicatory, plural numitory, sense pluratory, 
and ambi genitory. 

then, a word of the agnomaclade cladeitory. mono rclatory, monocladed 
by its application, absolute, neclinatory, belonging to its own 
mono. (His disciples said, (then who can be saved?) There- 
fore who can be saved?) See page 153. 

can, a word of the gnomaclade cladeitory, gnomacladed by its nature, 
inedable prediphemitory, poecorme rclatory, formative pository, 
phemic titneatury, belonging to who. 

be, a word of the gnomaclade cladeitory, inedable prediphemitory, 
poecorme relutory, and exfurmative pository, belonging to who. 
(No limedex.) 

saved, a word of the gnomaclade cladeitory, gnomacladed by its na- 
ture, edable prediphemitory, poecorme rektory, exformative 
pository, belonging to who. 

2. [{Thou shalt love the Lord) is the first commandment.] 

" Thou shalt love the Lord," a mono of the individual poecorme cor- 
mitory, cormified by its application, sinefu actional indicatory, 
and singular numitory. (So plural, no gender.) 

is, a word of the gnomaclade cladeitory, gnomacladed by its nature, 
inedable prediphemitory, dicornuc rclatory, formative pository, 
and phemic timeatory, belonging to the poecoime mono, 
" Thou shalt love the Lord," and to tbe nepoecorme word, com- 
mandment. 

the, a word of the agnomaclade cladeitory, meta rclatory, nictacladcd by 
its nature, absolute neclinatory, belonging to commandment. 

first, a word of the agnomaclade cladeitory, meta rclatory, comparative 
clinatory, super indicatory, belonging to commandment. (Sub, 
fore; supersub, former; super, foremost, or first.) 

commandment, a word of the generic nepoecorme corrnitory, cormi- 
fied by ment, sinefunctional indicatory, singular numitory, aDd 
s pluratory. 

" Thou shalt love the Lord." 

Thou, a word of the proxy poecorme corrnitory, cormified by its na- 
ture, representing the reader, the auditor of the sentence; 
poeic exhibitory, auditive indicatory, singular numitory, nepos 
pluratory (ye,) and muo genitory. 

shalt, a word of the gnomaclade cl.ideitory, gnomacladed by its na- 
ture, poecorme relatory, formative pository, postjihemic time- 
atory, belonging to thou. (This gnomaclade li is no jnrdiphe- 
mic timedex — hence it should not be referred to a prediphemi- 
tory.) 

love, a word of the gnomaclade cladeitory, gnomacladed by its appli- 
cation, edable prediphemitory, dicormic rclatory, exformative 
pository, belonging to thou, and Lord. 



PASSIMATION. 173 

the, a word of the agnomaclade cladeitory, meta relatory, metacladed 
by its nature, absolute Declinatory, belonging to Lord. 

Lord, a word of the generic nepoecorme cormitory, cormified by its 
nature, sinefunctional indicatory, singular numitory, s plura- 
tory, and masculine genitory. 

[(" For God) (to do wrong) is impossible."] 

[(" To do wrong) is impossible."] 

{To do wrong) a semimono of the individual poecorme cormitory, 
cormified by its application, sinefunctional indlca.tory, and sin- 
gular numitory. (No plural.) 

is, a word of the gnomaclade cladeitory, gnomacladed by its nature, 
inedable prediphemitory, poecorme relatory, formative posi- 
tory, and pkemic timeatory, belonging to the poecorme semi- 
mono, " To do wrong.'''' 

impossible, a word of the agnomaclade cladeitory, meta relatory, meta- 
claded by its nature, or by hie, from impossibility, absolute ne- 
clinatory, belonging to the cormic semimono, " To do wrong." 

(" For God.") 

For, a word of the agnomaclade cladeitory, stero relatory, stcrocladed 
by its nature, absolute neclinatory, belonging to God. 

God, a word of the generic nepoecorme cormitory, cormified by its 
nature, sinefunctional indicatory, singular numitory, s plura- 
tory, and masculine genitory. 

(" to do lurong" , ) 

To, a word of the gnomaclade cladeitory, clano relatory, clonocladcd 
by its application, absolute neclinatory, belonging to do. (To 
is here used to prevent a command.) 

do,a word of the gnomaclade cladeitory, gnomacladed by its nature, 
inedable prediphemitory, nepoecorme relatory, exformative posi- 
lory, and phemic timeatory, belonging to God, expressed, and 
to deeds implied. The semimono has but two timedexes; viz: 
the phemic, and the presyndiphemic. 

wrong, is a word of the agnomaclade cladeitory, meta relatory, me- 
tacladed by its nature, relative neclinatory, belonging to 
deeds. 

deeds, implied, is a word of the generic nepoecorme cormitory, cormi- 
fied by its nature, sinefunctional indicatory, plural numitory, 
and s pluratory. 

4. [I went] (for to tcalk.) 

For, a word of the agnomaclade cladeitory, stero relatory, sleroclaued 

p2 



174 M0N0IZ1NG RULES. 

by its nature, absolute neelinatory, belonging to the semimono, 
to walk. 
To walk, a semimono of the individual nepoecorme cormitory, cor- 
mified by its application, sinefunctional indicatory, and singu- 
lar numilory. 

to walk. 

to, a word of the agnomaclade cladeitory, clono relatory, clonocladed 
by its application, absolute Declinatory, belonging to walk. 

walk, a word of the gnomaclude cladeitory, gnomacladed by its na- 
ture, edable prediphemitory, poeconne relatory, exformative 
pository, and phemic timcatory, belonging to /. 

MONOIZING RULES. 

As the pupil is now to leave his Syntax to be exercised 
in some other book, it may be necessary to give him some 
rules to enable him to divide a sentence into its different 
monos. 

1. Every cordictive proposition, whether plenary, or 
implenary, constitutes a distinct mono; as, [A certain man 
planted a vineyard,] (and , set a hedge,) (and , 

digged a place,) (and , built a tower,) (and 
, let it out,) (and , went.) 

2. Every steroclade, or preposition gives a new mono; 
as, he went (unto the mount) (of Olives.) 

3. Every monoclade, or conjunction gives a new mono; 
as, [[Paul , , ,] (and Silas sung praises,) [I 

, , ,J (and thou art here.) 

4. When the regular connection of a corme with a sen- 
tence, is not produced by a dados word, but by the sense 
itself, the corme with its clades, should it have any, consti- 
tutes a distinct mono; as, (my good boy,) come here, (ah,) 
(John,) have you come again! (See Rules, page 19.) 

SPECIMEN IN MONOIZING. 

In the beginning, was the word; and the word was with 
God; and the word was God. 

was the word, a plenary unbroken gnumemrme, direct course, predi- 
phemic timede.v. Rule I. (Repeat the Rule.) 

In the beginning, a plenary unbroken agnomeclad, direct course, uni- 
relation, belonging to its superior mono. Conjeclive Reading. 
The word was in the beginning. Rule II. 



EXERCISES. 175 

(The agnomeclad has no timedex.) 

ttad the word was, a plenary unbroken gnomeclad, direct course, pre- 
diphemic timedex, plusrelation, belonging to its superior 
monos. Conjctive Reading. [The word was] (in the begin- 
ning) {and the word was.) Rule I, or Rule 111. 

Rule I will apply to every case to which Rule III is ap- 
plicable, for there is always a cordictive proposition where 
there is a monoclade. Yet there is some advantage in Rule 
III; a monoclade is a mark which can be seen, whereas a cor- 
diction is something which can not be seen. 

with God, a plenary unbroken agnomeclad, direct course, unirela- 
tion, belonging to its superior mono. Connective Reading. 
And the word was with God. 

and the word was God, a plenary unbroken gnomeclad, direct course, 
prediphemic timedex, plusrelation, belonging to its superior 
monos. Conjective Reading. (And the word was) (with God) 
(and the word ioas God.) 

EXERCISES. 

These exercises may be prepared by the pupil, upon his slate. 
I address you as his friend. 
John went into the field as a soldier. 
I meet you as a friend. 
We are much distressed with pain. 
He stood without the gate. 
He stood within the circle at that time. 

" You have attempted to kill me with yonr arrow — but 
I am still flying." 

" You have thrown an instrument of death at me, how- 
belt, 1 am still alive." (Howbeit is synonymous with 
nevertheless.) 

44 I am still alive, though you have done your best to 
kill me." 

44 I am flying, although you have attempted to stop me." 

"You have thrown your arrow at me — however, I am 
not dead." 

" You seek my life; howsoever you can not take it." 

44 You have not killed me if 'you have throw your arrow." 
[if is here, although.) 

44 You wish to stop my flying; nevertheless, you have 
not succeeded." 

44 1 shall continue my flight notwithstanding all your 
arrows." 



176 EXERCISES. 

11 Your arrow has pursued me to deprive me of life, and 
wing, nathkss, I still have hoth." (NatJdess is synony- 
mous with notwithstanding.) ^ 

" Yon wish to kill me; yet you can not." 

«' It rains, still, there are no clouds." 

I must not use another's book when I have one of my 
own. 

They accommodate one another daily. 

Give , , James another apple. 

The interest of another , is not as dear to me a? 
my own , , 

I claim this one for my own , ; but another , 

claims it as another's , 

This day suits my interest; another , may suit 
another's , better than this , , , , . 

Any interest except my own , is another's , 

Ah, here comes another , ; and of course ano- 

ther's views are to be given; another's interest , to 
be taken into the affair; and another's whims , , 

, , , , prejudices , , , 

and , opinions , to be nursed. 

Give , , me such , as I pur- 

chased, and , , as much , as I purchas- 
ed; and I shall be satisfied. 

Do , the job in such a manner as will please 
him, and he will give, , you as many dollars as 
will pay you well for your trouble. 

Such , as I have, I will give unto thee. 

No such thing was ever declared as he seems to re- 
collect. 

, Much as man desires a little will answer. 

As Jesus passed by he saw a man that was blind from 
his birth. 

As long as 1 am in the world, I am the light of the world. 

He was good as well as , , rich. 

They came to my school as pupils. 

For further Exercises take the timedex concordances, 
page 90, 



SYNTITHOLOGY. 177 

PART V. 

SYNTITHOLOGY. 

CHAPTER I. 

Syntithology is that part of Syntax, which teaches how 
to put words together in the formation of gnomods, sen- 
tences. 

Syntithology is divided into two parts: viz. Prose, and 
Syntithody, or Prosody. 

Note. Syntithody is derived from the Greek, sun, together, tithemi, 
to put, and ode, a song, and means, from these sources, the putting 
together of songs, or verses. 

Prosody is derived from the Greek, pros, for, and ode, 
a song, and means, from these sources nothing but for a 
song. We leave the British grammarians to say, whether 
it is sense, or not ! 

1. Prose syntithology teaches the principles of putting 
words together in such a way as produces straight forward 
sentences, or sentences in which there is no turning back 
to produce harmonic sounds, or a regular number of syl- 
lables. 

Note. Prose is from the Latin, prosa, from prosus, meaning 
straight forward. Verse is from the Latin, versus, and means turn- 
ing back. 

2. Syntithody, or Verse Syntithody is the second part 
of Syntithology, and teaches the quantity of sounds, and 
the measures of verse. 



Prose Syntithology teaches the principles of forming 
prose sentences; as, '■'•Moses smote the rock.'' 1 

It may be divided into three parts: viz. Government, 
Agreement, and Position. 

1, Government respects the influence which one word 



178 SYNTITHOLOGY. 

exerts over another in giving it some particular form, or 
character; as, thou writest well. 

" Thou''' gives u ivritc," the st inflection. 

2. Agreement respects the exact correspondence in some 
of the semenological properties of two, or more words; as, 
those ladies send their respects to you." 

Those, ladies, and their agree in numeration; all being plural. 

3. Position respects the place of a word, or a mono, in 
reference to another word, or another mono; as, they rode 
for two days together; I will call, and pay you again. 

By the position of " together," the days are represented as being 
together. And by the position of " again," the speaker is made to 
say, that he will repeat the payment. In the following construction, 
the above sentences arc changed in meaning: " They rode together 
for two days." " I will call again, and pay you." 

REMARKS. 

Some of the poecormes affix the s, es, th, t, and the st inflection to 
the gnomaclades; as, He has written, He icrites, Thou hast written. 

Other poecormes cut off" these inflections; as, I have written, They 
have written, we write. 

These affixes, s, es, th, t, and st, are called poecorme inflections, 
because they are produced by the poecorme. 

The s, es, and the th inflection belongs to the gnomaclades of the 
phemic, and presynphemic timedex only; as, He icrites, He has 
written. 

The t, and st run through all the timedexes; as, Thou writer, 
Thou ha.st written, Thou hadst written, Thou wrote**, Thou will 
write. 

poecorme inflections: s, es, th, t, st. 

It may be well to observe here, that the old British Rule, "The 
verb must agree with its nominative case in number, and pi 
intended for the regulation of the poecorme inflections. Hud these 
inflections never existed, (his Rule would never have had a place in 
English Grammars. This Rule, however, lias not the bast bearing 
upon these inflections — it is even applied where they are not found: 
as, lie wrote! (Sec the Appeal, chap. XIV. page 218.) 

RULES. 

For correcting those improprieties which lie, 

First, in the use of the poecorme inflection itself; as, I 
writes, (s.) 



RULES. 179 

Secondly, in the want of a particular poecorme inflec- 
tion; as, Thou writeth, (st.) 

Thirdly, in the use of be, or some of be's substitutes; 
as, I be, (am.) 

I. Poecorme inflections of the Gnomaclades. 
s, es, th, t, st. 
II. Inflective Substitutes.* 
am, art, is, are, was, ivast, were. 

1. Rule, be, . No inflections. 

2. Rule, am, was, . 

3. Rule, art, was, t, st. 

4. Rule, is, was, s, es, th. 

5. Rule, are, were, . 



A mere command, or a mere petition cuts off the poe- 
corme inflections from all gnomaclades, and rejects all in- 
flective substitutes; as, Be thou here in time, Forgive thou 
our faults, Go thou to school, Come ye home.f 

Specimen of correcting by Rule I. 

Gives me a book, John. 

Improper: the error lies in the s inflection of give. The impropri- 
ety is a violation of Rule first, which says, &c. as, give me a book 
John. 

EXERCISES. 

Comes here, Charles, and reads. 

Writes these copies accurately, John. 

Comes in, Sir. 

Returns to me, John, immediately. 

Forgives thou us our sins. 

lias thou mercy upon us. 

RULE II. 
The singular poecorme of the formative indication, re- 

* That is, entire words used as substitutes for inflections, 

t There may be a command with an affirmation; as, Thou shalt 

not steal. And there may be a petition with an intenog'ition; as. 

Will you lend me your kniiW 



180 RULES. 

quires am, or was, and cuts off the poecorme inflection* 
from every other gnomaclade; as, I am, I was, [I (that am 
now weak,) was once strong.] The lad called (on me) 
who am his uncle, I write, If I was there, Was I there, I 
could see him. 

In the above instances, who, and that are singular, and formative. 

Note. The singular poecormes of the formative indication, are i, 
who, that. 

How can the numeration, and the indication of who, and that be 
determined? By the corme which these proxies represent — for who, 
and that take the numeration, and the indication of those cormes for 
which they stand. I who, me who, I that, me that. Here, the nume- 
ration of who, and that is singular; and their indication is formative. 

We who, we that, us who, us that: plural, and formative. 

Thou mjAo, or fAaf, ftae who, or <A</£. Here, the numeration is sin- 
gular, and the indication is auditive. 

["They called me] (that speak) (to you.") Why is that, in this in- 
stance, singular, and formative? Because it represents me. 

Specimen of correcting bad English, in tvhich there is an 

application of the second Ride. 

"I laughs." 

Improper: the error lies in the s inflection of laugh. The impro- 
priety is a violation of Rule second, which says, &c. (Here let the 
pupil read the Rule.) 

As, I laugh. 

REMARK. The pupil should not say the error lies in is, consent. 
&c; but in the t, st, s, es, or th inflection, or in the use of is for 
em, &c. 

Exercises to be corrected according to the preceding Spe- 
cimen. 

I sings very little. I is. 

I be in good health. I runs. 

I cans read Franch. I believest. 

I will return. Says I. 

I wast. Thinks I to myself. 

I art. Says I, you cannot return. 

[The child saw me] (who is its present protector.) 

[They called me] (that speaks) (to you.) 

[I (that reads so well) is now to declaim.] 

[1 (who art bad) must repent.] 

[I (that are friendly) (to all) are glad to see thee.] 

[I (who teaches thee) art thy brother.] 

The following instances are considered correct English as they now 
stand. Nothing is more obvious, however,'than that they are inccrrtrt. 



RULES. 181 

When two, or more things are noted separately, there is 
no plurality; as, " 7, and he are, 7, and thou are." 

Here the individuals are denoted separately, hence while 
there appears, from a slight glance, to be but one affirma- 
tion in a sentence, there are in truth two. On? is made by 
expressed words, the other by implied ones: [I , 
and he are.) [I , ] (and thou are.) 

Now, by rendering these monos plenary, we shall con- 
vince grammarians of the gross error which we trust the 
world will gradually, and gladly correct: 

1. [I are] (and he are.) 

2. [I are] (and thou are.) 

Corrected: 

1. [I am] (and he is.) 

2. [I am] (and thou art.) 

But the monos should of course be left in their implenary state; 
as, 

1. I, and he is. 

2. 1, and thou art. 

Improper: 

1. I, and he write. 

2. He, and thou write. 

Proper: 

1. I, and he writes. 

2. He, and thou writest. 

Rendered Plenary: 

1. I write, and he writes. 

2. He writes, and thou writest. 

1. I, and he write. 

2. He, and thou write. 

By rendering these monos plenary, it is seen that they are actu- 
ally bad English: 

1. I write, and he write! 

2. He write, and thou write ! 

In instances in which or occurs, the gnomacladc, or verb is pro- 
perly used: 

I, or he is; He, or thou art. 
Rendered Plenary: I am, or he is; He is, or thou art. 

To be corrected. 

♦John , , ,] (and I are sick.'') 

1 Samuel ,»»»»] (and I are good 
boys.") 

Samuel is a good boy; and I am a good boy. 

Q 



l. [«,J 

8. t« I 



182 RULES. 

3. ["Nathaniel , , , ,] (and I are pu- 
pils.") 

4. [*' He , , ,] (and I were there.'*) 
See the Appeal page 239. 

RULE III. 

If there is neither a command, nor a petition, the singu- 
lar poecorme of the auditive indication, requires art, or 
wast, and gives the t, or si inflection to every other glioma- 
clade; as, Thou art, Thou wast, If thou art, If thou wast 
there, Wast thou there thou couldst see thy friend, [1 saw 
thee] (who didst betray my friend.) 

Note. The singular yoccGrmes of the auditive indication, are t hov , 
who, and that. 

Specimen of correcting by Nule III. 
I hope that ihou am well. 

Improper: the error lies in the use of am for art. The impro- 
priety is a violtlion of Rule III, which says,*&c: as y I hope lhat thou 
art well. 

EXERCISES. 

Is thou reading, Charles'? 

Thou is my friend. 

Perhaps thou be a teacher. 

Thou smiles. 

Thou art in error, Thomas. 

Thou wrote too soon. 

'ihou am called a hasty man. 

Why am thou not a philosopher? 

Do thou love thy neighbor? 

Thou loved thy brother too little. 

Thou did not see him. 

Thou has a fine book, Stephen. 

Thou were at my house. 

Thou saw him with me." 

[The child saw thee] (who am its present protet . 

|_I called thee] (that speaks) (to her.) 

[Thou (that reads so well] am now to declaim.] 

[Thou (who is bad) should repeat.] 

(See Remarks, page 181.) 
1. ["John , , ,] (and thou are sick.") 



RULES. 183 

2. jj* Samuel *,?,,] (and thou are 
good boys.") 

[Samuel is a good boy,] (and thou art a good boy.) 

3. "Nathaniel , , , ,] (and thou are pupils.") 

How can Nathaniel be two? it is here asserted that Nathaniel is pu- 
pils, and that thou art pupils! ! 

4. [" James , , ,] (and thou read books.") 
[James reads books,] (and thou readest books.) 

5. [" He , , ,] (and thou were there.") 
Does thou require were, or wast?" 

RULE IV. 
The singular poecorme of the sinefunctional indication, 
requires is, or was, and gives the s, es, or the th inflection, 
in the phemie, and the presynpheniic timedex, to every 
other gnomaclade which can take these inflections; as, He 
is, He was. He has a book, He has or hath written a 
book, The jury* has or hath agreed, The meeting is large, 
The family was well, Was he well he would, attend, I 

, , and he is, ii He , , . , and she has 

arrived," 

Note. May, can, must, might, could, would, should, will, shall^ and 
•ought cannot take the s, es and th inflection. 

Specimen of correcting by Rule IV. 

He write to his friend every week. 

Improper: the error lies in the want of the s inflection of write. 
The impropriety is a violation of Rule IV, which says, &c.; as, he 
writes. 

EXERCISES. 
He am with John. He write his copies too fasf. 

Joseph art my brother. John have returned. 

She are his sister. She move gracefully. 

Stephen walk with me daily. He drink too much water. 
It rain quite fast. The apple taste sweet. 

She sing sweetly. The grass grow high. 

James have a new book. He appear well. 

* Every name of an assemblage, or collective body, is singular, un- 
less it has the plural form; as, Jury, Church, Committee, Congress. 
Two jury, six church, is as good, as jury are, church are! 



184 RULES. 

Neither precept, nor discipline are so forcible as example. 

Either the boy or the girl were present. 

Neither character, nor dialogue were yet understood. 

Either money, or credit are necessary to all. 

John, or James write letters. 

Were he, or his mother at church? 

There are enough already. 

Parliament have at length dissolved. 

The court have disagreed. 

The jury are not unanimous in opinion. 

The committee agree upon this point. 

The meeting were well attended. 

The Hock are fed. 

When the nation complain, its rulers should listen. 

The regiment consist of a thousand men. 

The crowd are so great that I cannot get through it. 

The weight* are sixty pounds. 

1. ["'Socrates , , , , ] (and Plato 
ivere eminent philosophers." 

2. [The son , ] (and father meet.'] 

3. [Life , ] ( , .,)(,.,.) 
(and death are) (in the power) of the tongue.") 

4. [" The time , , ] (and place were appointed.") 

5. [Idleness , , , ] ( , , , ) 
(and ignorance are the parent) (of many vices.") 

6. [" I , ](, thou , ) (and he write.") 

7. [" Every plant , ] ( , , , ) ( , 
every flower , ) ( , , , ) (and every 
drop (of water) abound) (with living creatures.") 

8. [" Wisdom , ' , ] ( , virtue , , ) 
(and happiness dwell there.") 

9. ["Every desire (of the heart) , , ] ( , 
, ) ( , , , ) (and every secret thought 

is known) (to him) (who made us.") 

10. ["Each day ,,,](,, , 

, ) (and each hour being some business) (that re- 
quire our attention." 

Corrected. 
Socrates, and Plato was an eminent philosopher. 

* The preceding is the poecorme, and controls the gnomaclade; as, 
The wage* of sin arc death, Death is the wages of sin. 



RULE?. 185 

The son, and father meets. 

Life, and death is in the power of the tongue. 

The time, and place was appointed. 

Idleness, and ignorance is the parent of many vices. 

I, thou, and he writes. 

Wisdom, virtue, and happiness dwells there. 

Every plant, every flower, and every drop of water abounds 

with living creatures. 
Every desire of the heart, and every secret thought is known 

to him who made us. 
Each day, and each hour brings some business that requires 

our attention. 

Note. It may be well enough to say here that the British English 
Grammarians, and the American English Grammarians, give to and 
no power over the gnomaclade, the verb, in cases like that in the 
seventh, ninth, and tenth example. Hence they write the gnoma- 
clade, or verb with its poecorme inflections: 

" Every plant, every flower, and every drop of water 
abounds (not abound) with living creatures." 

This, which, strange to tell, is considered a mere ex- 
ception, is in truth English, while the other form which is 
considered to be founded on the general principle, is not 
English. 

1. The general principle; "John, and Joseph are good 
children." 

2. A mere exception: " Every boy, and every girl is a 
good child." 

What is it, yes, what is it which renders are proper in 
the first, but improper, in the second? 

By rendering the first plenary, it will be seen how 
exactly ihe fact accords with the import of the proposition: 

John are good children, and Joseph are good children! I 

It is a singular doctrine which compels a simple propo- 
sition to make two children out o^ one! 

Let us turn it into English: 

[John >?>>>] (and Joseph is a good 
child.) 

" That is, John is a good child; and Joseph is a good 
child." (See the Appeal, page 237.) 

Note 1. When the poccormes are singular, and of different indi- 
cations, the last controls the expressed gnomaclade, or verb; as, I, or 
thou art in error, Thou, or I am in error. 
Q2 



186 RULES. 

Note 2. When the poecormes are of different numerations, the 
last controls the expressed gnoniaclade, or verb; as, I, or they are in 
error, Thou, or they are in error. 

Notf. 3. To, in the semimono, whether expressed, or understood, 
cuts off all the poecorme inflections, and confines the gnoniaclade to 
its radical state; as, They went to see the man, They saw the ship 
, move. 

RULE V. 

The plural poecorme cuts off all the poecorme inflec- 
tions, and, except in a command, or a petition, requires are, 
or were; as You write, Ye are, They are. 

Specimen of correcting by Rule V. 
" We is well pleased." 

Improper: The error lies in the use of is for are. The impropriety 
is a violation of Rule V, which says, &c. 

As, we are well pleased. 

EXERCISES. 

They be fine apples. 

You is good children. 

Ye art reading my part. 

They was in Philadelphia. 

They am not in this place now. 

The gentlemen art satisfied ; and the ladies is much 

pleased. 
These lads runs. What signifies good opinions? 
Hence comes wars. 
Disappointments sinks the heart. 
Fifty pounds (of wheat) contains forty pounds (of flour.) 

N. B. The following Rule may be read, and the exercises under 
it may be made to suit it. Yet, as the Rule itself is founded in error, 
the author can not recommend any person to speak, or write by it. 
The doctrine of this Rule, is discussed in the Appeal, under page 
237; and to this discussion the reader is earnestly desired to give his 
attention. 

The author hopes that such a reformation will so soon take place in 
the minds of the learned, that the discussion of this Rule, and the Ex- 
ercises under it, may be expunged from the next edition of this work. 

RULE VI. 

In compliance with custorn, but in opposition to the 
principles of our language, the ellipsis in the superior mono, 
of the gnoniaclade which is expressed in the inferior mono 



RULES. 187 

subjoined by and, cuts off the poecorme inflections, and, if 
there is neither a command, nor a petition, requires are, or 
were; as, ["I , ,] (and John laugh.'") 

["I , , , ,] {and thou are his friends.") 
("Thou , , , ,) {and I were his friends.") 

(See page 181.) 

That it is the ellipsis which cuts off these inflections, and requires 
are' or were, is obvious from the fact that when the superior mono is 
made plenary, the singular poecorme in both monos, has the same in- 
fluence over the gnomaclade, which it has where and does not occur; 
as, [** I am his friend"] (and he is his friend,") Not, [I are his 
friends;] (and he are his friends.) [I laugh;] (and John laughs,) Not 
[I laugh] (and John laugh.) 

The verb, then, receives the plural form as they call it, not because 
of and, not because of the two nominatives which we are told are 
connected by and, but merely, because the verb which is expressed in 
the mono subjoined by and, is understood in the mono to which and's 
mono is conjected ! The verb, then, agrees, not with the nominative, 
but with the ellipsis in the superior mono ! ! 

The following exercises are correct English as they now stand, ac- 
cording to the principles of that relation which exists between the 
poecorme, and the gnomaclade — but still they are placed under the 
sixth Rule, to be deformed, (not corrected) by the doctrine of custom. 

EXERCISES. 

Socrates, and Plato was an eminent philosopher. 

The son, and father meets. 

Life, and death is in the power of the tongue. 

The time, and place was appointed. 

Idleness, and ignorance is the parent of many vices. 

I, thou, and he writes. 

Wisdom, virtue, and happiness dwells there. 

Every plant, and flower abounds with living creatures. 

Every desire, and secret thought is known to him who 
made us. 

Each day, and hour brings some business that requires 
our attention. 

RULE VII. 

The proxy corme should agree with its principal which 
it represents, in indication, numeration, and gender; as, 
" Mother had seen James before she called him, 11 M The 
jury will remain out till they have agreed on a verdict." 

They, represents the word, members, implied. 



188 RULES. 

Specimen of correcting by Rule VII. 
"Take handfuls of ashes, and let Moses sprinkle it 
toward heaven." 

Improper: the error lies in the singular numeration of it — the im- 
propriety is a violation of Rule VII, which says, the proxy comic, 
&c; as, 

And let Moses sprinkle them. 

EXERCISES. 

No person is fully satisfied that they will not be de- 
ceived. 

The minds of men are active — it must have something 
to work on. 

Each of them received the amount to which they were 
entitled by law. 

I gave him oats — but they would not eat it. 

I gave the horse hay — but they would not eat them. 

I gave the horse grass — but lie did not eat them. 

I gave the ox spires of grass — but he did not eat it. 

Note 1. When, for brevity, the name of the assemblage, or col- 
lective body, is used instead of the name of its constituent parts, the 
mind dissolves the body into the several parts, and the proxy corme 
represents the name of these parts; as, the jury will remain out till 
they have agreed on their verdict. 

Here, they represents members. 

EXERCISES. 

The jury will continue out till it have agree on a verdict. 

The council was not unanimous, and it separated without 
coming to any determination. 

The committee was divided in sentiment, and it referred 
the business to a general meeting. 

The enemy was not able to support the charge; and he 
(led. 

The defendant's counsel had a difficult task imposed 
upon it. 

The family is not so well pleased with its situation as 
it expected to be. 

Note 2. When the name of the assemblage! or collect ivc bodv, 
is not used for the name of the constituent parts, (members) the mind 
does not dissolve the body into its several parts — hence the proxy 
corme represents the true name of the collective body; as, A com- 
mittee was appointed; and it made a report upon the subject. 



RULES. 189 

Here it represents, not members, but committee, the true collective 
name. 

Specimen of correcting under Note 2. 
" The crowd is so great that I can not get through 
them." 

Improper: the error lies in the plural numeration of them. The 
impropriety is a violation -of Note II, under Rule VII, which says, 
When the name of the, &c; as, I cannot get through it. 

EXERCISES. 

The crowd is so great that I cannot get through them. 

The company was very small at first; but they increased 
daily. 

The school is quite large now; and they still grow 
larger. 

The third flock of sheep is fed; but they are not 
watered. 

Note 3. When the proxy corme runs into a clade, the clade 
represents the name of multitude, in a cladeijied form, {committee's) 
not members understood, and should remain in its singular form; as, 
the committee published its proceedings. [Not their proceedings.] 

EXERCISES. 

When the nation complains, their rulers should listen. 

This company conducts their business with accuracy, 
and despatch. 

The church will conduct their own business. 

The family is very well with the exception of two of 
their members. 

The school must attend to their writing now. 

This class has lost some of their members. 

Note 4. When the proxy corme is preceded by two principals 
of different semenological characters, it commonly takes the indica- 
tion, numeration, and gender of the nearer; as, I am the man icho 
commands you. 

Did who represent /, who would then be of the formative; hence it 
would be, who command? (no s,) for ivho by representing I, would be- 
come equal to / in indication, numeration, and gender; and you would 
not say I commands; but I command. 

There is something in / which indicates that the person alluded 
to by I, is the former of the sentence. The word, man, however, 
has nothing of the kind. True, 1, and man denote the same 
person — hence the word, man, must denote the former of the senteno- 
as much as '*/." But, then, the word, man, has no tongue, no means 



190 RULES. 

with which to tell, to indicate that it denotes the former. The word 
/, however, has the means of indicating- that it (/) does denote the 
former. Hence the difference between I, and man in indication. 

EXERCISES. 

I am the man who command you. 

I am a person who adopt that sentiment, and maintain it. 

Thou art a person who possesses! bright parts; but who 
hast cultivated them but little. 

I am a man who speak but seldom. 

Thou art the friend that hast often relieved me; and that 
hast not deserted me in time of peculiar need. 

I arn the boy that write letters. 

You are the boy who pick my apples. 
RULE VIII. 

Every agnomaclade that is formed from a proxy corme, 
must represent some agnomaclade which is formed from 
some principal corme by the apostrophe ' , and .•>-, ('«) or by 
the apostrophe only ' , and must agree with it in indica- 
tion, numeration, and gender: as, John saw his brother, 
The jury will remain out till its members have agreed. 

Here "A/'s" represents, not John, but the metaclade, John's; as, 
John saw John's brother. 

And il its" represents, not "jury" but the metnclade, jury's; as, 
The jury will remain out till the jury's members have agreed on a 
verdict. 

EXERCISES. 

Can any person on their entrance into life be fully secure 
that he shall not be deceived? 

The minds of men cannot bo long without some food to 
nourish the activity of its thoughts. 

Each of them in their turn receives the money to which 
they are entitled. 

Each of the boys took their own hook. 

He teaches mathematics with all its branches. 

Carry the scissors to its place. 

John, and James have found his books. 

Stephen, or Joseph has returned their copy. 

I have examined the subject of alms ia all their conse- 
quences. 

RULE IX. 

Have, through all its variations, gives the following gno- 



RULES. 191 

maclade the havible form; as I have begun, Thou hast 
written, He has walked, They had flown, He hath -put. 
(Not, have began, hast wrote, has walk, have flew, have 

Specimen of correcting by Rule IX. 
I have did it. 
Improper: the error lies in the want of the havible form of did. 
The impropriety is a violation of rule ix, which says, &c. as, I have 
done it. 

EXERCISES. 

I have came. He has wrote his copy. 

I have drank. I would have wrote a letter. 

The birds have flew. He has drank. 

He had mistook his true interest. 

He has wove the web. The river was frozen over. 

They had chose the part of honor and virtue. 

My people have slid backward. 

He has broke the bottle. 

The price of cloth has lately rose very much. 

His vices have weakened his mind, and broke his con- 
stitution. 

RULE X. 

Be, through all its variations, gives the following gnoma- 
clade a beible form, as, The book is ivritten, I am writing, 
Letters are ivritten, Water is drunk. 

Specimen of correcting by Rule X. 

The hat was took. 

Improper: the- error lies in the want of the beible form of took. 
The impropriety is a violation of rule x, which says, &c; as, the hat 
was taken. (Sue page 93.) 

EXERCISES. 

It was drank. 

His resolution was too strong to be shook by opposition. 

The horse was stole. 

The Rhine was froze over. 

She was invite into the drawing room. 

Some fell by the way side, and was trod down. 

The work was very well execute. 

It has been did. 

The French language is spoke in many CO tm tries. 



192 RULES. 

Note. The prediradical nontimedcx should never be used unless 
have, or be is either expressed, or understood before it; us, " He done 
well," " I seen him this week," (have done, have scon.) (See Nontimc- 
dexes, page 93.) 

RULE XI. 

When the time and event both exist at the period in 
which they are mentioned, with no other cessation than oc- 
casional intermission, the phemic timedex should be used; 
as, They frequently call on us. 

RULE XII. 

The presynphemic timedex should be used where a por- 
tion of the time within which the event is placed, yet re- 
mains; as, 

1. I have written a letter to day. 

3. I have seen him twice in my life. 

3. I have never drunk better water. 

A portion of my life yet remains — and as these events are placed 
within the period of my life, the presyn phemic timedex must be used. 
He who has passed completely through; or he whose period of life is 
perfectly passed off, may look back through the prediphemic timedex; 
as, 

1. I saw him twice in my life. 

2. I never drank better water in my life. 

(See page 87.) 

Specimen of correcting wider Rule XII. 
" I wrote to my brother to-day." 
Improper: the error lies in the use of the prediphemic timedex. The 
impropriety is a violation of Rule XJI., which says, &C-; As I hapt 
written to my brother to-day. 

EXERCISES. 

I saw my uncle Thomas in market this evening. 

Mr. Jones made a thousand dollars this year. 

John, did you do the job yet? 

Did you see your sister since you have been in Philadel- 
phia? 

I purchased this hook this evening. 

I spoke with my brother since 1 came out. 

Will you go, James? No, I concluded to remain at home. 
RULE XIII. 

When the period of time within which the event is placed, 
is all passed ofT, and taken as disconnected with any other 



RULES. 193 

time, the prediphemic timedex should be used; as, 
1. I wrote a letter to my brother yesterday. 

Specimen of correcting under Rule XIII. 

I have made out very well last year. 
Improper: the error lies in the use of the presynphemic timedex, 
where the time is perfectly passed off, and unconnected with other 
time. The impropriety is a violation of Rule XIII, which says, &c; 
as, I made out very well last year. 

EXERCISES. 

I have written to my brother a number of times while he 
was in Bostoi . 

While I was writing this work, I have prepared another 
for the press. 

He has seen me last week in Philadelphia. 
RULE XIV. 

Where one event takes place before another, the first 
mono should have the presyndiphemic timedex; as, 

1. [They had dined before] (I arrived.) 

2. I had concluded to return before I got my father's 
letter. (See page 88.) 

Specimen of correcting. 

I returned before John came home. 

Improper: the error lies in the use of the predxphemic timedex, for 
the presyndiphemic. The impropriety is a violation of Rule XIV., 
which says, &c. As, I had returned before John came home. 

EXERCISES. 

Joseph wrote his copies before school commenced. 

Jane learned her lesson before she went to school. 

God created the earth before he formed man. 

I was in business a number of years before my brother's 
death. 

They saw me twice at my own house before I called on 
them. 

RULE XV. 

When the superior part of the mono is founded upon a 
hope, command, desire, intention, or duty, the semimono 
should have the phemic timedex, as, 

1. They meant to write last week. 

2. Wc desired to find him at home. 

R 



194 RULES. 

3. They bade* him return the book. 

4. I told him to bring the articles. 

5. " He ought to come." 

Note. This rule is clear: clear because the prrsyndiphemie 
timedex would denote that whatever is hoped for, commanded, de- 
sired or intended, had been realised before even the existence of the 
hope, command, desire, or intention. 

Specimen of correcting. 

I saw him to have drunk the wine. 

liiiDropcr: the error lies in the use of the presyndiphemic timedex 
for the phetnic. The impropriety, is a violation of RuLI XV, which 
says, &c. As, I saw him drink the wine. 

EXERCISES. 

They meant to have written last week. 

We desired to have found him at home. 

The teacher told us to have done these sums. 

They intended to have returned home. 

AVe hoped to have seen all the family happy. 

They desired us to have gone home with them. 

He ought to have returned. 

RULE XVI. 

Where the event expressed in the semimono, had hap- 
pened before that expressed in the superior part, the pre- 
syndiphemic timedex should be used in the semimono; as, 

1. I was delighted to have seen my brother. 

2. He was glad to have paid the debt. 

Here it is clear that the seeing had taken place before the delight 
was felt; as, He was delighted on Saturday to have seen his brother 
on Friday. 

It is also obvious that the payment had been made before the glad- 
ness was felt. 

Specimen of Correcting. 
I was much pleased yesterday to see you the day before 
at my house. 

Improper: the error lies in the use of the phemic for the prcsyndi- 

* If bid, dare, make, see, behold, hear, feel, need, or have, is 
found in the superior part, to, except in the potic series, should not 
be expressed in the semimono; as, I saw him , write 

this letter. 

Dare forms an exception to this note when it signifies to challenge. 



RULES. 195 

phemic timedex. The impropriety is a violation of Rule XVI, which 
says, &c. As, I was much pleased yesterday to have seen you the 
day before, at my house. 

EXERCISES. 

I was very sorry last evening to see you the night before, 
at a public house. 

I have been happy to-day to see you at church last Sab- 
bath. 

RULE XVII. 

When the events in both parts of the mono happen at 
the same time, both parts should have the phemic, or the 
superior, the prediphemic timedex; as, 

1. I am delighted to see you. 

2. I was delighted to see you last week. 

Specimen of Correcting, 

I was delighted to have seen you. 

Improper: the error lies in using the presyndiphemic for the phe- 
mic timedex. The impropriety is a violation of Rule XVII, which 
says, &c As, I was delighted to see you. 

EXERCISES. 

I was pleased yesterday to have seen you yesterday. 
I hope to have got a letter to-day. 
I saw you to have written the letter. 

Before leaving the timedex of the semimono, it may be well enough 
just to say that the very common, and highly authorized expression, 
he "ought to hate written," is no better than "he hoped to have seen 
his son." 

The word, ought denotes duty — written denotes an action — and 
have indicates that he had done the action even before the duty is 
represented as existing! He should have written, is good. 

RULE XVIII. 
The postphemic timedex should be used where the 
event is individual, not habitual, where the post time allu- 
ded to consists of but one portion, and where the event is 
to take place, not before, but within that one portion of time; 
as, I shall dine at two o'clock, I will see you again . 

Note. Where the event is habitual, the phemic timedex is gene- 
rally used; as, When the stage returns, we shall see our friends. 

The returning of the stage is spoken of as an habitual event, a 
customary act; hence the phemic timedex is used: (returns.) The 



196 RULES. 

seeing of our friends is not mentioned as an habitual event — hence it 
has the postphemic timedex: (shall.) 

RULE XIX. 

Where the nature of the case makes two portions of 
poslphemic time, and the event, whether individual, or 
habitual, mentioned in the first mono, is to take place 
within the first portion, but before the commencement of the 
second, the first mono should have the prepostphemic time- 
dex; as, " When the stage shall have returned, we shall 
see our friends; W r e shall have dined by two o'clock; I 
shall have seen the merchant before you return. 

Note. There arc from the nature of the case three points of time 
which in some sense, or other regard this sentence. First, there is the 
phemic, the time within which the sentence was formed. Secondly, 
there is a postphemic portion within which I am to do the act of seeing 
the merchant. Thirdly, there is the postphemic portion which falls 
immediately after that postphemic portion within which the act of see- 
ing is to take place — and within this portion which may be called the 
^osf-postphemic, the act of returning is to be done. 

John will call before you set out for Boston. 

Improper: the error lies in the use of the postphemic for the pre- 
postphemic timedex. The impropriety is a violation of Rule XIX, 
which says, &c. 

As, John will have called before you set out for Boston. 

EXERCISES. 

W r e shall get some news by 11 o'clock. 
James will write you before next week. 
He will send you the book before you want it. 

Note. In the monos of the affirmative kind, will have should not 
be used with /, or we; nor shall have with thou, or ye, nor with any 
poccormc of the sinefunctional indication; as, 

1. I will have written, &c. 

2. Thou shalt have written, &c. 

3. He shall have written, &c. 

There is an obvious absurdity in promising in sucli instances. But 
to foretell is consistent; as, 

I shall have written, &c. Thou ivilt have written, &c. 
He will have written, &c. 

Shall, in the formative indication, only foretells; as, I shall go to- 
morrow. In the auditive, and sinefunctional, shall promises, com- 



RULES. 197 

mauds, or threatens; as, You, or they shall be rewarded, Thou shalt 
not steal, The soul that sitmeth, shall die. 

Will, in the formative, denotes a promise, or resolve; as, I will not 
let thee go. 

In the auditive, and sinefunctional, will generally foretells; as, He 
will reward the righteous. (See page 98.) 

Before leaving the timedexes, it may be well to observe 
that the mono in which the radical nontimedex is used in 
the formative position, has no distinct time of its own — its 
time is always decided from some other mono; as, He 
being a wise man, we give heed to his counsel, (phemic.) 

He being a wise man, we gave heed to his council. 
(Prediphemic.) 

RULE XX. 

Monos which are subjoined by and, or, neither, either, 
and as well as, when they can be left in an implenary 
state, should agree in timecUx with those monos to which 
they are subjoined; as, I have read, and, written many 
books. 

EXERCISES. 

I have read, and wrote many books. 

He saw me, and has satisfied me. 

He saw me, and even had called me. 
RULE XXI. 

Where an exhibitive proxy corme is to be used as the 
nepoe corme, the dicormic gnomaclade, (or transitive verb.) 
requires the nepoeic proxy corme; and the poeic gnoma- 
clade, (or neuter and passive verb,) requires the poeic 
proxy corme; as, John saw me, Whom did James see? John 
took it to be him. 

It is she, It was J, We are they, Who do men say that I 
am? I have been called he, John is thought to be he. 
(See page 123.) 

(Not, John saw /, Wlio did James see? I took it to be 
he, It is her, It was me, We are them, Whom do men say 
that I am? I have been called him, John is thought to be 
him.) 

The nepoeic proxy corme is sometimes placed after be, a porir 
gnomaclade; as, 

I thought it to be him. 



198 RULES. 

But him is not introduced by he. Him is a member of the 
superior part of the mono, and mny be seen thus: 

[I thought it him] (to be.) 

Him, then, is the nepoecorme of thought. 

It is not easy for beginners to manage constructions like the fol- 
lowing: 

1. Who do people say that I am. 

2. He is the person whom they say that Mr. Johnson 
taught. 

But by breaking such sentences into monos, the pupil, and even 
many of our translators of the scriptures, may find some aid in cor- 
recting bad English. 

The gnomecorme: [Do people say that?'] 

A gnomeclad: (ivho I am?) 

The gnomecorme: \_He is the per son. ~\ 

Gnomeclads: \ W mn Mr t ) J f' nson la "S ! "-) 
I {they say that.) 

The variations of be are, am, art, is, are, being, was, icast. irere, 
and been. 

EXERCISES. 

Who do you see, James? 
They have called he, and I. 

Mother taught she, and him that they should rise early 
It is me. 

Whom do the people say that I am? 
1 took it to be he. 
They thought that it was me. 
We think that it was them. 
Is this her? 
Was that him? 

John called her, he, they, thou, and I, to the house. 
Who is the teacher? that man is called him? 
Are you the gentleman who performs these marvellous 
cures? I have been reputed him. 
By whom have you been called him? 
I have been denominated him by all. 
Who first styled you him? 

RULE XXII. 
The cormes in the implenary subjoined mono must have 
the same sentcological character that thev would if the 



RULES. 199 

mono was plenary; as, John saw him, and her, I, thou, 
and he went, I purchased the hats of Mr. Jones, , 
, he that lives in South Eighth street. That is, I pur- 
chased the hats of Mr. Jones; who is he that, &c. 

EXERCISES. 

These young gentlemen saw them, and we at church. 

They, and us went to the Fosters, them that teach in 
Philadelphia. 

He purchased his hat of Stephen Shepherd, him that 
lives in Broadway. 

I went to see my brother, him that lives in London. 

Their sister, her that lives in New York, is now in Phi- 
ladelphia. 

RULE XXIII. 

Me, and us should follow cormes of exclamation; as, Ah! 
me. O! us. 

These proxy cormes, however, are not controlled by 
cormes of exclamation; but by some gnomaclade under- 
stood; as, ivhat has befallen me, or Ah, ruin has overtaken 
me, or, will overtake me. 

Note. Thou follows cormes of exclamation; as, O! tliou wretch . 
That is, O! thou art a wretch. 

Thou, then, is the poecorme of art understood — and me in the other 
note, the nepoecorme of befallen, or overtaken, understood. 

RULE XXIV. 

Steroclades; should come before their cormes, and require 
the nepoeic proxy corme instead of the poeic; as, To whom 
do you speak, John? (Not, ivho do you speak to, John?) 

EXERCISES UNDER RULE XXIV. 

(Who [do you speak] to,) Nancy?] 

He put his hand upon some one, but I do not know upon 
who. 

He called for Charles, John, and I. 

[Steroclades refer] (to nepoecormes) (which (they should 
stand) before.) 

[Give (me) some water] (which to wash in.) 

(Who [does he speak] of?) 

(What [does he think] of?) 

Observation. The same steroclades which follow the 



200 RULES. 

primitive word, generally follow the derivative; as, Derive 
from, Derivation from, Friend to, Friendly to. 

Note I. Where the relation denoted by the steroclades is mere 
acquaintance, of should be used after friend; as, lie was a friend of 
mine. 

But when the relation is real friendship, or genuine affection, to 
should be used; as, He is a friend to the poor, They have long been 
friends to me, Washington was a friend to his country. 

Note IT. Although generally, the same sterocladc which follows 
the primitive words, tbllows the derivative, yet we say diminish from; 
but diminution of — and sometimes friend of; but in all cases, friend- 
ly to. 

Note III. One corme should not be subjoined to another, unless 
both will admit the same sterocladc; as, This is a rule, and guide to 
his conduct. 

Now, as we cannot say rule to, the construction of the sentence 
should be changed, that each corme may have its proper sterocladc; 
as, This is a rule of, and a guide to his conduct. 

Note IV. Between, and betwixt should be used where there are but 
two things — among, and amongst, where there are more than two; as, 
Between these two, there is great contention; but among those three 
there is great harmony. 

Note V. When we are disappointed in obta-ining a thing, we use 
of; as, They have been disappointed of money. 

But when we possess the thing, and the quality docs come up to 
our expectations, wc use in; as, They are disappointed in these silks. 

Note VI. During should be used only where the event continues 
through all the period which is mentioned; as, I have written letters 
during the day. 

Where the event does not continue throughout the whole period, 
in, to, or within should be used; as, I have written three books within 
this year, I have written three letters to day. 

EXERCISES UNDER THE ABOVE NOTES. 

Subtraction is a derivative of subtract. The derivation of 
one word of another, &c. 

Washington was a friend of his country. 

This is a guide, and rule to his conduct. 

He divided the apple between his few friends. 

There should be no difference betwixt those three bro- 
thers. 

The property will be divided among the two brothers. 

"This document which has just been printed, states that 



RULES. 201 

during the past year, 1,721,000 pages of tracts have been 
distributed in the city of New York." 

" On one occasion during the peninsular war, the same 
regiment came suddenly upon the French army." 

'• 1 had occasion during our preliminary remarks on 
knowledge, to insist much on the importance of accurate 
language." 

" The substance of the three first lectures which appear 
in the present volume, was first delivered in Cincinnati, 
during the course of the last summer. 

" Conditions. — Two dollars if paid in advance, two dol- 
ars, and fifty cents if paid during the year!" 

in, and at. 

1st. In is employed before the names of countries, cities, and large 
towns; as, I live in (not at) New York, They are in America, They 
reside in Lancaster. 

2d. At is employed before the names of foreign cities, villages, 
(whether foreign, or not,) and small towns; As, They live at Rome, 
She resides at Springfield. 

3d. At is generally employed, after be, when be is literally applied; 
as, I shall be at church, They have been at church, They are at (not 
to) churchy 

EXERCISES. 

He lives at New York. 

They reside at Lancaster. 

Our friends who live at Rome are at Philadelphia. 

I was to the Banking house last week. 

I was to church last evening." 

He purchased these books to this bookstore. 

invite, &c. 

Invite, when the mono shows where the invitation is given, requires 

in; as, He invited me in the street, to call at his house. 
Invite, when the mono shows to what place one is invited; requires 

into, or to; as, He invited me into his house, They invited her to 

our house. 
In, may be used as a clonocladc; as, He invited me in. 
Put, when the mono shows where the act is done, requires in; as, lie 

put his hand upon me, in this room. 
Put, when the mono shows into what something is put, requires n?'o; 

as, He put the dollar into his pocket. 
Split, when the mono shows where something is split, requires in; as, 

He split the log in the cellar. 
Sjlit, when the mono shows the division itself of a thing, requires 

into; as, He split the log into tico. 



202 



Took, requires in, as a clonoclade; as, they took the stranger in. 
Took, requires into as a sterocladc; as, fie took the book into his 

hands. 
Walk, when the mono intimates tiie leaving of one place for another, 

requires into; as, He walked into the house. 
Walk, when the mono shows where the action is done without inti- 
mating the leaving of one place for another, requires in; as, He 

walks in his own room. 
Walk, requires in as a clonoclade; as, Will you walk in, Sir? 
Key, when the corme denotes a part of a thing, requires of; as, This 

is the key of that lock. 
Key, when the thing mentioned is presented as a kind of guide, or clue, 

requires to; as, This event furnishes a key to all the secrets in 

the case. 

EXERCISES. 

This is the key to that lock. 

This fact is a key of the true cause of this event. 

There are the keys to that musical instrument. 

He put his knife in his pocket. 

He took the book in his own hand. 

They invited him in the house. 

Will you walk in this room? 

He broke the glass in fifty pieces. 

They split the log in two. 

Let them be made in pairs. 

A TABLE. 

Arrive requires at, not to. 

Accuse requires of, not for, nor with. 

Abhorrence . . . . requires of, not at. 

Acquit requires of, not from. 

Adapted requires to, not for. 

Agreeable .... requires to, not with. 

Averse requires to, not from. 

Bestow ..... requires upon, not on. 

Boast ..... requires of, not about. 

B ra g requires of, not about. 

Broke requires into, not in. 

Call ..... requires on, not upon. 

Confide requires in, not to. 

Conversant .... requires in, not with. 

Conformable .... requires to, not with. 

Consonant .... requires to, not with. 

Correspondent ) 

Correspond, $c. \ " " rc 1 uircs to, not inlh. 

To Correspond, to keep up an intercourse with another by writing, 
or letter, requires with, not to. 



RULES. 203 

Correspondence, (intercourse by I requireg ^ ^ ^ 

Compliance - requires wi^A, not to. 

Cui requires i«fo, not in. 

Dependent - - - requires upon, not on. 

Derogation .... requires /rom, not of. 

Differ (to dispute) - - - requires w>i<A, not /rom. 

Differ in opinion ... requires /nwn, not tfliJA. 

Dissent ----- requires /rom, not w>i£A. 

Diminution ... - requires o/, not /rom. 

Disappointed - may have in, or tcifA. 

When we are disappointed in obtaining- a thing- we use of — but 
when in the quality, or character of a person, or thing, we use in. 

Discouragement, according to the sense, may have of, by, in, or with. 
Glad, may have of, or at, but not on. 

Difference, may have among, between, or betwixt, but rarely of. 
Failed, requires in, or of, according to the sense; as, He failed in his 
business, because he failed of collecting his demands. 

EXERCISES. 

I arrived in Boston on Monday. 

"They have been accused of having aided in this act of 
theft." 

They confide to each other. 

John called upon me for money. 

He brags about his activity. 

James is conversant with Greek. 

He acted conformably with his instruction. 

It corresponds with the sample. 

His compliance to his brother's proposition injured me. 

He will resent any derogation of his good name. 

I dissent with that gentleman's opinion. 

Any diminution from the original sum will displease 
them. 

I was disappointed in money. 

That book is not adapted for beginners. 

He failed in collecting his money, and consequently, 
failed of his business. 

They differ with each other in opinion. 

MONOCLADES. 

Whether, and either require or; as, he is either good, or bud, it is 
not known whether he is good, or bad. 

Neither requires nor; as, he would neither do it, nor permit me to 
do it. 



204 RULES. 

Although, and though require yet, or nevertheless; as, Though the 
house is small; yet it is very convenient, Although he was rich, yet for 
our sakes he became poor, Though he desires it, nevertheless I can not 
yield. 

As, in a comparison, requires so; as, As your day is, so it shall be 
unto you. 

As, where it refers to a metaclade in a comparison of equality, re- 
quires as; as, I think Milton as great a poet as Virgil. 

So, where it refers to a metaclade requires that, or as; as, I was so 
tired that I fell asleep. 

As, and so in these cases are clonoclades. 

How many of the following sentences are correct? 
Is it possible that he is as tall as I? 
There are no men so excellent as some foibles can not 
be ascribed to them. 

He thought Bolivar as great a general as Washington. 

RULE XXV. 
The following corme cladeifres the preceding one by 
affixing the \ and s, or the (') only; as, John's hat, The 
boy's book, Ladles' hats. 

Note 1. Singular cormes, terminating with but one s, and cormes, 
whether singular or plural, having- no s in their termination, become 
clades by affixing an apostrophe and s; as, 's. 

1. James's glove, - 

2. John's hat, - 

3. A lady's ring, - 

4. A child's tooth, - 

5. Children's teeth, - 

6. Teeth's position, - 

7. Charles's hand, - 

Note 2. Singular cormes terminating in -s, and plural ones termi- 
nating in s, become clades by affixing an apostrophe (') only; as, 

1. For holiness' sake, - 

2. For goodness' sake, - 

3. Bliss' book, - 

4. Ladies' hat, - 

5. Eagles' wings, - 

Remark 1. When the cladeifying s, used as the sign of possession, 
will coalesce with the corme itself, the s is pronounced in the same 
syllable; as, John's hut. 

But when the s docs not harmonize, another syllable is added in the 
pronunciation; as, Thomas', Bliss'. Pronounced, Thomasis — Missis. 



RULES. 205 

Remark 2. Where several apostrophic clades fall in succession, it 
is deemed sufficient by some grammarians, to express the cladeic, or 
possessive sign after the last word only; as, John, Jane, Stephen, and 
Chester's book. 

The cladeic, or possessive sign is understood at John, Jane, and 
Stephen — but it certainly should be expressed after each word; as, 
John's, Jane's, Stephen's, and Chester's book. This is "Jane books," 
is not English. 

EXERCISES. 

Pompeys pillar. A mothers tenderness. 

Virtues reward. A fathers care. 

A good mans heart. Natures gifts. 

Helens beauty. Troys destruction. 

RULE XXVI. 

The clonoclades, or adverbs which refer to other clades, 
should have the ly termination, if the word will take it;* 
as, They conducted modestly, They write accurately, He 
conducted extremely modest. 

He writes correct. 
Improper: the error lies in the want of the ly inflection of correct. 
The impropriety is a violation of Rule XXVI, which says, &c. 
As, He writes correctly. 



She sings sweet. 

Grammarians should speak accurate. 
Sophia dances beautiful. 
The ship moves smooth along. 
The water runs rapid. 
This is written very correct. 
He conducts himself very upright. 
It is remarkable fine weather. 
They conducted agreeable to the rules of decency. 
Go soft, John. 

Considering his station, he conducted himself very un- 
suitable. 

Note 1. The ly inflection should not be given to the superior 
clonoclade when the inferior can take it; as, she behaved exceedingly 



* There arc a few exceptions to this rule; for instance, A new 
fashioned hat, He is a high minded man. 



206 RULES. 

But if the inferior cannot take the ly inflection, and the superior 
can, this inflection must be given to the superior; as, she behaves very 
discreetly. 

Note 2. In some few instances the quality is expressed as belong- 
ing to the event, but by inference carried to the thing; as, The grass 
appears green. 

In such the clonoclade, or adverb should drop the ly. Green shows 
low the grass appears, not how it is. 

Note 3. There are some clonoclades that represent the certain 
condition, or state which the person, or thing receives from the action 
denoted by the gnomaclade, or verb, which should drop the ly; as, He 
.-inks deep, The purest clay burns white, The pupil should write 
slowly, and exact. 

EXERCISES UNDER NOTES 1, 2, AND 3. 

They behaved exceedingly rudely. 
They write remarkably accurately. 
They behaved astonishing rudely. 
He behaves uncommon badly. 
Drink deeply, or taste not the Pierian spring. 
Heaven opened widely her ever during gates. 
The victory cost them dearly. 
Thickly, and more thickly the steelly circle grows. 
The cakes taste shortly, and crispy. 
John marched straightly up a steep ascent of steps which 
were cut closely, and deeply into the rock. 
It makes the plough go deeply. 
The sun shines brightly. 
The water runs clearly. 
The grass grows straightly. 
He came firstly. 

RULE XXVII. 

Two negative words should not be used in the same 
mono; as, I have not done nothing, He did not see no 
man come in, He will never do nothing, (dny man, any 
thing.) 

EXERCISES. 

Will you not give me no apples, Stephen? 
I neither got nothing of John, nor of James. 
He will neither eat nothing, nor drink nothing. 
1 can not help him no more. 
He will not give him nothing for his trouble. 



207 



RULE XXVIII. 



Where a mere preventive against the corme's widest 
application, is all that is desired, a should be used; as, a 
man called on me, and gave me a book. 

A becomes an before a vowel, or silent h; as, an age, an hour. 

A is not changed into an before u long. This exception arises from 
the w's having the power of initial y, and u; as in yew, a unit, a use. 
An is used before words beginning with h sounded, when the accent 
is on the second syllable; as, an historical account. 

RULE XXIX. 

Where identity, either by an expressed, or an implied 
description, is obvious, and totality desirable, the should be 
used; as, give me the books which you hold in your right 
hand. 

Note I. Where emphasis is desired, that, or this may be used in- 
stead of the. 

Note II. Where unity is the leading idea, one should be used in- 
stead of a; as, there was but one man lost, though many were in great 
danger. 

Note III. The may be repeated to give force, and fulness of ex- 
pression; as, the good, the wicked, the young, and the old, &c. 

Note IV. When the same individual is spoken of in reference to 
two, or more of his qualities, or occupations, a should not be repeated; 
as, He is a better writer than reader, This is a better barn than house. 

Note V. When two, or more individuals are spoken of in compa- 
rison, a must be repeated; as, He is a better writer than a reader , . 
This is a better barn than a house , 

Note VI. When two distinct individuals, or two collections are 
meant, the, and a should be repeated. 

1. He purchased the black and the white ox. 

2. I have the red, and the white cloth. 

3. He saw the lad, or the pupil last evening. 
3. The sentensic, and the insentensic corme. 

Note VII. When but one individual, or but one assemblage is 
meant, the should not be repeated. 

1. The black, and white ox. 

2. The red, and white cloth, or clothes. 

3. He saw the lad, or pupil last evening. 



208 RULES. 

RULE XXX. 

All metaclades which express number must agree with 
their cormes in number; as, He lives at the corner of Third, 
and Jirch street, This man, Each man, Two men, Either 
man of the two, That man, Those men. 

Specimen of Correcting. 

" It is believed that the tenth, and eleventh editions have 
been greatly improved." Kirkhani's Grammar. 

Improper: the error lies in the plural number of " edit ion." The 
impropriety is a violation of Rule XXX, which says, &c. As, " it 
is believed that the tenth, and the eleventh edition has been greatly 
improved." 

EXERCISES. 

His second, and third daughters live in Philadelphia. 
The third, and fourth classes may go out. 

Note. When the plural form of the subjoined corme, makes too 
many of the same kind, the subjoined corrne should remain singular, 
and the steroclade, or preposition should be understood before it; as, 
He went to Arch , and , Market street. 

If it should be, Arch, and Market streets, the expression would be 
inconsistent with truth: for there are not two Arch streets, nor two 
Market streets in the mind of him who speaks. 

REMARKS. 

this, and that, these, and THOSE. 

This should be used in contrast with that, or those; that, in contrast 
with this, or these; these, in contrast with that, or those; and those, in 
contrast with this, or these; as, 

Give me this plate, and not that, Give me that plate, 
and not this, Give me those plates, and not this, Give me 
this, and not those. 

THIS, THAT, THESE, THOSE. 

This, as well as these, refers to what is nearer by, as to time, or 
space: that, as well as those, relates to what is further off cither in 
time or space; as, 

In the city, we are entertained by the works of man: 
in the country by the works of God; this is the presence 
of nature, that of art; these astonish us, those we com- 
prehend. 



209 



SUCH, EACH, EITHER, and NEITHER. 



Note I. Such should be used in reference to things previously 
mentioned, only; as, I have sweet fruit — such you like. 

Note II. Either, and neither, as metaclades, refer to one of two; 
as, I will take either , of the two, Neither , offAetwo, 
suits me. 

Note III. Each, has respect to two, or more, individually taken; 
as, Each , of the two; each , of the six. 

Note IV. When the plural form of the subjoined corme makes too 
many of the same kind, the subjoined corme should remain singular, 
and the first set of clades be limited by the repetition of the, to the 
antecedent corme, understood; as, He teaches the Latin, and thr 
Greek language, He found this doctrine in the new, and the old tes- 
tament. 

EXERCISES. 

Who is a professor of the Latin, Greek, and Hebrew 
languages? 

He has studied the English, and the French languages. 

REMARKS. 

When one thing, or collection is mentioned, the metaclade should 
have the clonoclade indication; as, Red bird, or red birds. 

When two things, or collections are compared, the metaclade should 
have the supersub indication; as, these birds are redder than those: 
this bird is redder than that. 

When as many as three things, or collections are compared, the me- 
taclade should have the super indication; as, this is the reddest of the 
four. 

EXERCISES. 

That bird is the reddest of the two. 
Stephen has two sisters, the eldest of whom is the best 
reader. 

Which of these two kites is the highest? 

He chose the last of the two. 

This is the better pen of the three. 

John is the better reader of the six. 

Of all other schools this has the better regulations. 

RADICAL NONTIMEDEX. 

When the radical nontimedex becomes a corme, all the clonoclude.s 
or adverbs which refer to it must have the same form as though they 
referred to it in its gnomaclade, or verb character; as, He was praised 
for the drawing of the picture accurately. 
I % 



210 RULES. 

When a, or the precedes the radical nontimedex, of should gene- 
rally be expressed immediately after it; as, His station in life is well 
adapted to the acquiring of knowledge, The not making of a will is a 
culpable omission. 

When ?ny,his, her, or any other metaclade of a similar import pre- 
cedes the radical nontimedex, of may either be expressed, or under- 
stood; as, John's buying goods, caused him much trouble, or John's 
buying of the goods caused him much trouble. 

RULE XXXI. 

Every clade must be placed as near its own superior 
mono as possible, and on that side of it, which perspicuity 
requires; as, 

Yet would the objector but consider that actions arc 
qualities, he would be able to see that a verb is an adjective 
" even by his own definition" of an adjective. 

The mono in italics, is properly placed. In the following, however, 
it is so placed as to make the objector say what t he does not intend, 
and to leave unexpressed, what he wishes to communicate: 

Yet, would the objector but consider that actions are 
qualities, he would be able to see by his own definition, 
that a verb is an adjective. 

In the first, the idea is that " his own definition'''' is the means by 
which a verb is made an adjective: 

In the second, the idea is that his own definition is the means by 
which you can see that a verb is an adjective. 

RULE XXXII. 

Every inferior clade must be placed as near its own su- 
perior as possible, and on that side of it, which perspicuity 
requires; as, I will call again, and pay you. 

By a different position of again, the idea now expressed, would be 
lost, and a different one suggested; as, I will call, and pay you again 

Perspicuity should never be rejected for ease, and harmony of ex- 
pression. Sentences may be rendered fuller for the sake of force, 
and beauty of construction, provided the fulness does not obscure the 
sense which the writer means to convey. 

EXAMPLE. 

Where the writer means that the beholder can discover nothing but 

BIRDS. 

John can only see the birds. 

Corrected: — John can see the birds only-— ox 

John can see, only the birds. 



POEOLOGY. 211 

EXERCISES. 

Samuel will write the letters indeed. 

Sister will arrive peradventure. 

Twice they returned. 

He is here not often. 

William nobly acted. 

" They can not well read unless distinctly they see the 
print." 

" They presented their gifts which being not received 
they became unhappy." 

He, and I shall part never. 

PART II. 

Syntithody is the second part of Syntithology, and 
teaches how to form verse sentences; as, 

"Behold the Rose of Sharon here, 
The Lily which the valleys bear; 
Behold the Tree of Life, that gives 
Refreshing fruit, and healing leaves." 



PART VI. 

CHAPTER I. 

POEOLOGY. 

Poeology is that part of Syntax, which teaches the 
principles of forming words. 

Poeology is divided into two parts: 

Phonology, and Alphaology. 

1. Phonology is that part of Poeology, which teaches 
the principles of forming words from sound. (Phona a 
sound, and logos, a word.) 

2. Alphaology is that part of Poeology, which teache* 
the principles of forming ivords from letters. [Alpha, a 
letter, and logos, a word.) 



212 



VERBATORY. 



CHAPTER I. 

GXOMEOLOGY RESUMED. 



PUNCTUATION. 

Punctuation is that part of gnomeology, which consists 
of the art of dividing a gnomod, or sentence into its several 
parts, and of expressing, or denying a relation between 
those two parts which stand together on the paper. 

The following Characters divide a Book into Parts, and 
express the kind, and degree of Relation, that the parts 
bear to one another: 



Hyphen 
Comma 
Semicolon 


' 


Index 
Brace 


Colon 
Period 




Ellipsis 
Acute accent 


Interrogation 
Exclamation 


? 
t 


Grave accent 
Breve 


Dash 





Diaresis 


Parenthesis 


() 


Asterisk * 


Caret 


A 


Obelisk 


Paragraph 
Section 


IT 


Double daggei 
Parallel 


Quotation 
Brackets 


[] 


Asterisks 



A VERBATORY. 

A. 

Agnomaclade is compounded of the Greek elements, a. 
not, gnome, a sentence, or gnomod, atos, having the 
capacity to be formed, and klados, a branch. The word. 
agnomaclade, then, means a branch word which has not 



VERBATORY. 213 

the capacity to be formed into a gnomod, or sentence; as, 
the, of, a, &c. (See page 42, and 43.) 

Note. It may be well to observe that atos is a Greek suffix, and 
is synonymous with the common English affix, able in moveable, 
changeable, sentenceable, gnomeable. 

Agnomeclad is composed of the Greek elements, a, not, 
gnome, a sentence, or gnomod, and clados, a branch, and 
means a branch mono which is not a gnomod, or sentence 
in itself; as, He went to Boston. 

Alphaology is made from the Greek, alpha, a letter, 
and logos, a word, doctrine, science, principle, and means 
the principles of forming words from letters. 

Ambi, both. Pronounced ambe. 

C. 
Clad is derived from the Greek, klados, a branch, a de- 
pendent part, and means a mono which bears a branch rela- 
tion to another mono; as, [He went] (to Boston) (ivhere 
he remained.) 

Clade is constructed from klados, a branch, a dependent 
part, and means a word which bears a branch relation to 
another word; as, to Boston. 

" To Boston" is called a clad; but to is called a clade. 

Clonoclade is constructed from clonos, a branch, a 
clade, and clade, and means a clade which belongs, not to a 
corme, but to another clade; as, Remarkably cold nights. 

Connective, alluding to the act of putting things to- 
gether. 

Conjective reading, a process by which an inferior 
word, or mono is affixed to its own superior word, or mono, 
by uttering these two only; as, I saw John on last Sabbath 
at church. 

Conjective reading of " at church." I saw John at church. 

Connection, that local connection which is produced by 
conjective reading. 

To Conject, to put the inferior mono or word to its 
own superior mono, or word, without any regard to any 
other monos, or words; as, "the tire is quite hot." 



214 VERBATORY. 

Conjected: Fire is, Quite hot, Hot fire, The fire. 

Connective letters, those letters which are used in 
some of the prepared Exercises of this work, to show 
what two monos should be conjected; as, I saw him a on 
last Sabbath a at church. 

Cordiction is the Latin, cor, the heart, and dico, to say, 
and means that attribute of an assemblage of words, which 
renders it a gnomod, or sentence. 

REMARKS. 

It is a curious fact, that words, by means of their dictionary sig- 
nifications, are competent to express all our ideas but five. Now, 
these five ideas which the dictionary import of words, is unable even 
to touch, are the Jive cordictions. And it is curious also to find that 
men have supplied this deficiency in dictionary function, by giving 
to a certain class of words an extra significant, or expressing power. 
This extra endowment consists in a capacity to express an affirmation, 
an interrogation, a command, a petition, and a nutation. We examine 
our dictionary in vain to find a word whose affirmative power is its 
dictionary signification. Every word which has an affirmative, or 
any other cordictive power, has also a dictionary signification; as, 
" Moses smote the rock, John wrote this letter." The dictionary 
does not define the word, smote, and wrote, as meaning an affirmation, 
but as denoting certain actions. Hence the affirmative idea which is 
expressed in the above instances, is the result of the extra significant 
capacity with which men have endued these, and similar words to 
enable them to denote an affirmation, an interrogation, a command, a 
petition, and a nutation. 

(See nutation, page 16.) 

Corme, from the Greek, kormos, the trunk, the founda- 
tion part in the frame-work of a tree; hence in this work 
corme is applied to those words which are the foundation 
in the frame-work of a sentence, or mono; as, Moses smote 
the rock. [See Clade.] 

E. 

Ellipsis, an omission of one, or more words in a 
mono, or of one or more monos in a sentence; as, he went 
( , yesterday,) "By grace are ye saved ( , 

, ) through faith." 

Note. On is understood before yesterday; and which cometh after 
saved. 

Ex, out of some place, birth, or office. 



VERBATORY. 21 5 

Exformative Position, that place on the paper in refer- 
ence to the poecorme, which is not favorable to the exercise 
of sentence-forming power, and which is occupied by that 
gnomaclade, or by those gnomaclades which do not help 
form the sentence character; as, he shall have been punished. 

F. 
The Formative Position of a gnomaclade is the first 
place in relation to the poecorme; it is denominated the 
formative position, first, because it is in this place that the 
cordiction is formed; and, secondly, because no gnomaclade 
in the mono can aid in forming a sentence character unless 
it occupies this position. In the following instance it is can 
which furnishes the elements out of which the poecorme 
forms the affirmative cordiction. They can write. 

Write lies beyond the reach of the poecorme, they; they can not 
reach the cordictive principle which lies in write — write is in the ex- 
formative position. And to place write within the reach of the poe- 
corme, they must occupy the formative position: They write. 

G. 

Gnomeology is made from the Greek, gnome, a gnomod, 
or sentence, logos, principle, doctrine, and means the 
doctrine of a sentence. 

Gnomod is constructed from the Greek, gnome, a cor- 
dictive thought, and odos, a means, and signifies the means 
by which a cordiction is expressed, or it signifies an as- 
semblage of words which expresses a cordiction, in con- 
tradistinction from an assemblage of words, which does not 
express a cordiction. (Page 15.) 

M. 
Metaclade is from the Greek, meta, from one to another, 
and clade, a branch word, and means a clade which can be 
moved from the poecorme to the nepoecorme; as, The boy 
read the book. 

Monoclade is constructed from mono, and clade, and 
means a clade which is conjected, or applied to a mono; 
as, [He did not like the place] [hence he returned.) 

Monology is made from the Greek, monos, alone, and 
logos, a word, and means that word, or that number of 
words, which can be passimated alone. (Page 19.) 



w 



216* VERBATORY. 



N. 
Nepoecorme is constructed from the Greek negative, ne, 
poietes, a former, a maker, and from corme, and means that 
corme which does not form, or make the gnomaclade, or 
verb into the sentence; as, I am John. 

P. 

Poecorme is constructed from the G reek, poie/es, a former, 
a maker, and corme, and means that corme which forms 
the gnomaclade, or verb into the sentence; as, / am John. 

Poeology is from the Greek, poieo, to make, form, or 
create, and logos, a word; the proper formation of words 
from sounds, and letters. Pronounced, po-e-ol-ogy. 

S. 
Semtenology is constructed from the Greek, semaenos, 
to designate, to distinguish, and logos, principle, doctrine, 
and means the principles on which words designate those 
ideas to which the mere dictionary import of words con- 
veys no allusion, as, time, number, gender, &c. 

Steroclade is from the Greek, steros, fixed, and elude. 
a branch, and means a clade which in its cludos relation is 
confined to the nepoecorme; as, He went to Boston. (Page 
45.) 

Syncratology, (from the Greek, sun, together, or with. 
kratos, power, and logos, a word,) the conjunctive powers, 
and characters of words. The idea of together or con- 
junctive is from sun; that of power, and character, from 
kratos; and that of word, from logos. 

Syntithology, (from the Greek, sun, together, or with, 
tithemi, to put, and logos, a word,) the putting of words 
together. Pronounced, Syn-te-thol-ogy. 

This word is offered as a substitute for the word, Syntax. 
as applied by the British grammarians. 

Note. Syntax is too general in its import to be restricted to the 
putting of words together. The letters of a word are put together: 
Jis, Grammar. Hence there is as much Syntax in Orthography, as in 
any other part of Grammar. Indeed, there is no process in forming 
sentences, in which there is not a putting of parts together; hence the 
entire science is of a Syntactical, or conjunctive nature; th 
should be denominated Syntax. 



